TXC-04216AIBG [ETC]

Telecommunication IC ; 电信IC\n
TXC-04216AIBG
型号: TXC-04216AIBG
厂家: ETC    ETC
描述:

Telecommunication IC
电信IC\n

电信集成电路 异步传输模式 ATM
文件: 总144页 (文件大小:964K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
E1Mx16 Device  
E1 Mapper 16-Channel  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
FEATURES  
DESCRIPTION  
• Add/drop sixteen 2.048 Mbit/s signals from an  
STM-1 VC-4/AU-3, STS-3, or an STS-1  
• Independent add and drop bus timing modes  
• Selectable HDB3 positive/negative rail or NRZ E1  
interface. Performance counter provided for illegal  
coding violations.  
The E1 Mapper 16-Channel device is designed for add/drop  
multiplexer, terminal multiplexer, and dual and single unidi-  
rectional ring applications. Four field-proven QE1M Quad E1  
Mapper chips are interconnected in a single compact pack-  
age to permit higher application board densities.  
Sixteen E1 2.048 Mbit/s signals are mapped to and from  
asynchronous Tributary Unit-12s (TU-12s) or Virtual Tribu-  
tary 2s (VT2s). The E1Mx16 interfaces to a multiple-seg-  
ment, byte-parallel SDH/SONET-formatted Telecom Bus at  
the 19.44 Mbit/s byte rate for STM-1/STS-3 operation or at  
the 6.48 Mbit/s byte rate for STS-1 operation. This Bus per-  
mits the E1Mx16 to connect directly to other TranSwitch  
devices in application designs. The E1 signals can be either  
HDB3 positive/negative rail or NRZ format. The E1Mx16  
provides performance counters, alarm detection, and the  
ability to generate errors and Alarm Indication Signals (AIS).  
E1 facility and line loopback capabilities are also provided.  
• Digital desynchronizers  
• J2 16-byte ETSI trail trace comparison  
• Drop buses are monitored for parity, loss of clock,  
upstream AIS and H4 multiframe errors  
• TU Tandem Connection ETSI message  
processing and generation  
• Performance counters are provided for TU/VT  
pointer movements, BIP-2 errors and Far End  
Block Errors (REIs)  
• TU/VTs are monitored for Loss Of Pointer, New  
Data Flags (NDFs), AIS, Remote Defect  
Indication (RDI), and size errors (S-bits)  
• V5 Byte Signal Label Mismatch and Unequipped  
detection  
• E1 facility and line loopbacks, generation of BIP-2  
and REI errors, and send RDI capability  
• Intel / Motorola compatible microprocessor bus  
interface with interrupt capability  
APPLICATIONS  
• STM-1/STS-3/STS-1 to 2.048 Mbit/s add/drop  
mux/demux  
• Programmable internal RISC processor  
implements VT-POH and VT-alarm handling  
• Boundary scan capability (IEEE 1149.1)  
• Single +5V, ±5% power supply  
• Unidirectional or bidirectional ring applications  
• STM-1/STS-3/STS-1 termination terminal mode  
multiplexer  
• STM-1/STS-3/STS-1 test equipment  
• 388-lead plastic ball grid array  
(35 x 35 mm) package  
STM-1/STS-3/STS-1  
TELECOM BUS SIDE  
2.048 Mbit/s  
TRIBUTARY SIDE  
External Clock  
+5V  
7
Channel 1  
A - side  
drop bus  
13  
P & N data  
and clock for  
receive and  
E1Mx16  
A - side  
add bus  
14  
13  
14  
E1 Mapper 16-Channel  
TXC-04216  
transmit, plus  
receive data  
zero-output  
control  
B - side  
drop bus  
7
B - side  
add bus  
Channel 16  
5
3
Y
Boundary Microprocessor Controls  
Scan interface  
NAR  
I
M
U.S. Patents No. 4,967,405; 5,033,064;  
5,040,170; 5,265,096; 5,289,507; 5,297,180; 5,528,598; 5,535,218  
U.S. and/or foreign patents issued or pending  
Copyright 2000 TranSwitch Corporation  
E1Mx16 is a trademark of TranSwitch Corporation  
TranSwitch and TXC are registered trademarks of TranSwitch Corporation  
PRELI  
Document Number:  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
TranSwitch Corporation  
3 Enterprise Drive  
Shelton, Connecticut 06484  
www.transwitch.com  
USA  
Tel: 203-929-8810  
Fax: 203-926-9453  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
SECTION  
PAGE  
List of Figures ...................................................................................................................3  
Overview ............................................................................................................................4  
Features .............................................................................................................................5  
Block Diagram ..................................................................................................................10  
Block Diagram Description ...............................................................................................11  
Lead Diagram ..................................................................................................................15  
Lead Descriptions ............................................................................................................16  
Absolute Maximum Ratings and Environmental Limitations ............................................25  
Thermal Characteristics ...................................................................................................25  
Power Requirements .......................................................................................................25  
Input, Output and Input/Output Parameters .....................................................................26  
Timing Characteristics .....................................................................................................29  
Operation ................................................................................................................... 44-87  
Bus Interface Modes .............................................................................................. 44  
Bus Mode Selection ............................................................................................... 45  
SDH/SONET Add/Drop Multiplexing Format Selections ........................................ 45  
Drop TU/VT Selection ............................................................................................ 46  
Add TU/VT Selection ............................................................................................. 47  
Bus Timing ............................................................................................................. 48  
Unequipped Operation ........................................................................................... 48  
Drop Bus Multiframe Alignment ............................................................................. 50  
Add Bus Multiframe Alignment .............................................................................. 51  
Performance Counters ........................................................................................... 52  
Alarm Structure ...................................................................................................... 52  
Interrupt Structure .................................................................................................. 53  
SDH/SONET AIS Detection ................................................................................... 59  
TU/VT Pointer Tracking ......................................................................................... 59  
Remote Defect Indications ..................................................................................... 62  
Overhead Communications Bit Access ................................................................. 66  
J2 Byte Processing ................................................................................................ 67  
N2 (Z6) Byte Processing (Tandem Connection) .................................................... 71  
TUG-3 Null Pointer Indicator .................................................................................. 72  
E1 Loopback Capability ......................................................................................... 73  
PRBS Pattern Generator and Analyzer ................................................................. 74  
Resets .................................................................................................................... 74  
Start-Up Procedure ................................................................................................ 75  
Pointer Leak Rate Calculations ............................................................................. 76  
Jitter Measurements ................................................................................................77  
Internal SPOT Processors ..................................................................................... 82  
Boundary Scan ...................................................................................................... 86  
Multiplex Format and Mapping Information ........................................................... 88  
Memory Map ....................................................................................................................94  
Memory Map Descriptions ..................................................................................... 100-133  
Common Registers .............................................................................................. 100  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 2 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Port n Registers.....................................................................................................114  
Application Examples ....................................................................................................134  
Package Information ......................................................................................................135  
Ordering Information ......................................................................................................136  
Related Products ...........................................................................................................136  
Standards Documentation Sources ...............................................................................137  
List of Data Sheet Changes .......................................................................................... 139  
Documentation Update Registration Form* ..............................................................143  
* Please note that TranSwitch provides documentation for all of its products. Customers who are using  
a TranSwitch Product, or planning to do so, should register with the TranSwitch Marketing Depart-  
ment to receive relevant updated and supplemental documentation as it is issued. They should also  
contact the Applications Engineering Department to ensure that they are provided with the latest  
available information about the product, especially before undertaking development of new designs  
incorporating the product.  
LIST OF FIGURES  
Figure  
Page  
1. TXC-04216 Block Diagram ......................................................................................10  
2. 2048 kbit/s Asynchronous Mapping .........................................................................13  
3. E1Mx16 TXC-04216 Lead Diagram .........................................................................15  
4. Groups 1-4, Ports 1-4 E1 Transmit Timing ...............................................................29  
5. Groups 1-4, Ports 1-4 E1 Receive Timing ...............................................................30  
6. STS-1 A/B Drop and Add Bus Signals, Timing Derived from Drop Bus ...................31  
7. STM-1/STS-3 A/B Drop and Add Bus Signals, Timing Derived from Drop Bus .......32  
8. STS-1 A/B Add Bus Signals, Timing Derived from Add Bus ....................................33  
9. STM-1/STS-3 A/B Add Bus Signals, Timing Derived from Add Bus ........................34  
10. Microprocessor Read Cycle Timing - Intel ...............................................................35  
11. Microprocessor Write Cycle Timing - Intel ...............................................................37  
12. Microprocessor Read Cycle Timing - Motorola .......................................................39  
13. Microprocessor Write Cycle Timing - Motorola ........................................................41  
14. Boundary Scan Timing ............................................................................................43  
15. H4 Byte Floating VT Mode Bit Allocation .................................................................50  
16. TU/VT Pointer Tracking State Machine ....................................................................61  
17. Facility and Line Loopbacks .....................................................................................73  
18. Jitter Tolerance and Jitter Test Arrangements ..........................................................78  
19. Jitter Tolerance Measurements with Requirement ...................................................78  
20. Jitter Transfer Measurements ...................................................................................79  
21. Standard Pointer Test Sequences ............................................................................81  
22. Schematic Diagram of E1Mx16 Showing SPOT Processor Interfaces ....................84  
23. Recommended Implementation Flowchart for Reprogramming the SPOT Processor 85  
24. Boundary Scan Schematic ......................................................................................87  
25. Typical Application using the E1Mx16 ....................................................................134  
26. E1Mx16 TXC-04216 388-Lead Plastic Ball Grid Array Package ............................135  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 3 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
OVERVIEW  
The E1Mx16 (TXC-04216) provides the mapping of sixteen 2048 kbit/s E1 asynchronous signals into a  
multiple-segment, byte-parallel, SDH/SONET Telecom Bus for the STM-1, STS-3, or AU-3/STS-1 formats,  
using sixteen programmed asynchronous mode TU12/VT2 tributary signals. The E1Mx16 interfaces on the  
SDH/SONET side use four bus segments defined as A-side Drop and Add, and B-side Drop and Add. Selected  
TU-12/VT2 tributaries are mapped to and from either a 270 or 90 SDH/SONET column format.  
Using a dual bus architecture, the E1Mx16 can be configured in a system for dropping a TU-12/VT2 from either  
bus only, adding a TU-12/VT2 to either bus only, dropping and adding a TU-12/VT2 to either the A or B sides,  
dropping a TU-12/VT2 from either the A or B sides, and adding the TU-12/VT2 to the opposite bus (e.g. drop  
from A, add to B), or dropping a TU-12/VT2 from either A or B buses and adding the TU-12/VT2 to both buses.  
Bus timing for the Add side can be derived from either the Drop bus, or input signals to the Add bus.  
Each drop has an optional H4 byte detector for detecting the starting location of the V1 byte in the TU-12/VT2.  
Instead of using the H4 detector, a V1 pulse may be inputted to the E1Mx16. Each Drop bus is also equipped  
with an optional H1/H2 or the E1 bytes AIS detector for detecting an upstream AIS state. Each of the selected  
TU-12/VT2 for both the A and/or B drop buses has a pointer tracking state machine for determining the location  
of the overhead bytes and the E1 asynchronous frame bits. Each of the overhead bytes in the selected TU-12/  
VT2 is monitored for control and status information. The E1Mx16 can be configured to perform a J2 16- byte  
trail trace message comparison, N2 tandem connection message comparison and generation with error  
counters and status alarm indications, V5 single-bit or enhanced 3-bit RDI, REI, signal label mismatch and  
unequipped detection and generation, and K4 byte access.  
The E1Mx16 provides a desynchronizer/synchronizer for each port. An 8-bit pointer leak rate register is  
provided. The E1Mx16 satisfies the various jitter tolerance, jitter transfer, mapping jitter, and combined jitter  
requirements found in ITU and ANSI documents.  
Each of the asynchronous E1 line inputs can be individually configured to provide either an NRZ interface or a  
dual unipolar rail type interface. When configured for a rail interface, a B3ZS CODEC converts the rail signals  
to and from a NRZ signal. Coding violations are counted in a 16-bit counter.  
For overhead byte processing, the E1Mx16 uses an internal SPOT (SDH/SONET Processor for Overhead  
Termination). The SPOT is divided into four segments corresponding to the four groups of four mappers. The  
SPOT performs many of the overhead processing functions, such as J2 message comparisons. Programming  
of the SPOT is performed through the microprocessor bus. The microprocessor can access four separate  
segments of the SPOT which have individual select leads, corresponding to the four groups of four mappers.  
SELp (p = 1 to 4) are the microprocessor port select signals. SEL1 selects the first group of four mappers  
(channels 1-4) and SEL2, SEL3 and SEL4 select the other three groups of four mappers.  
The E1Mx16 is compatible with either Intel or Motorola split bus microprocessors. The E1Mx16 also provides  
interrupts to the microprocessor for operational alarm status indications.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 4 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
FEATURES  
The following features are supported by the E1Mx16:  
SDH/SONET FORMATS:  
STM-1 AU-4 VC-4 TUG-3 TUG-2 format  
STM-1 AU-3 TUG-2  
STS-3  
STS-1  
OPERATING MODES:  
The E1Mx16 supports the following modes of operation which are programmable by the microprocessor.  
Drop mode only (Add bus tristated)  
- Drop from A or B  
Add mode only  
- Add to A or B  
Single unidirectional ring  
- Drop from A, Add to A  
- Drop from B, Add to B  
Multiplexer  
- Drop from A, Add to B  
- Drop from B, Add to A  
Dual protection ring  
- Drop from A, Add to A and B  
- Drop from B, Add to A and B  
BUS TIMING:  
The E1Mx16 provides the following bus timing modes by lead selection with software overwrite:  
Drop bus timing  
- Add bus timing is derived from the same named Drop bus  
Add bus timing  
- Add bus timing is independent of the Drop bus  
SDH/SONET BUS INTERFACE:  
STM-1/STS-3  
- 19.44 Mbyte/s parallel interface  
STS-1  
- 6.48 Mbyte/s parallel interface  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 5 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Drop bus timing enabled  
- Drop bus inputs: Clock, SPE, C1J1V1, Data and parity  
- Add bus outputs: data, parity and active bus indication  
Add bus timing enabled  
- Drop bus inputs: Clock, SPE, C1J1V1, data, parity and bus indication  
- Add bus inputs: Clock, SPE and C1J1V1  
- Add bus outputs: Data, parity and active bus active indication  
Stuck clock indications  
- Input parity check with alarm monitoring  
Odd, even, data only, or all bus signals  
- Input loss of clock detection  
Stuck high or low  
SDH/SONET interface Add buses, A and B  
- Output parity generation  
Odd, even, data only, or all bus signals  
- Bus indication (polarity selectable through control bit)  
- Ability to High-Z the output bus signals  
MAPPINGS:  
The E1Mx16 has the following mapping features:  
Maximum of 16 E1 ports  
- Up to 16 E1 asynchronous mappings to TU-12/VT2  
TU-12/VT2 selection  
- Drop bus (common A and B sides)  
- Add bus (common A and B sides)  
Users responsibility to maintain TUG-2/VT group mappings  
SDH/SONET FEATURES:  
In-band upstream path and line AIS detection  
- H1/H2 pointer bits or  
- E1 bytes (majority vote)  
TU/VT pointer tracking for A and B sides  
- ETSI 1015-based state machine  
- Size error indication  
- 4-bit increment/decrement counters  
TU/VT A/B Drop and Add selection  
TU/VT pointer generation  
- Fixed to 105 for 2048 kbit/s E1 asynchronous format  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 6 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Low order TU/VT byte processing  
- J2 byte (programmable per port)  
64-byte host processor read cycle (no alignment)  
16-byte host processor read with ITU TTC message comparison  
- V5 byte and K4 (Z7) byte  
Single-bit RDI or enhanced 3-bit RDI alarm detection (5 or 10 event  
option, selectable through software control bit)  
REI (FEBE) counter (8 bits)  
BIP-2 detector and counter (8 bits) with block or bit error count  
Detect RFI (bit 4 in V5 byte)  
Signal label mismatch, unequipped detection,  
Access to K4 byte  
- N2 (Z6) byte  
Host processor access or  
Tandem connection option with:  
Multiframe pattern alignment  
16-byte message comparison  
TC RDI, ODI alarm detection  
REI and OEI counters  
- V4 byte access  
- Line AIS generation on SDH/SONET alarms with:  
Masks  
Microprocessor control  
Low order TU/VT byte insertion  
- J2 byte with 16- or 64-byte message  
- V5 and K4 (Z7) byte with:  
REI (FEBE) insertion (from receive side)  
RFI insertion (microprocessor control)  
BIP-2 calculation and insertion  
RDI insertion (from receive side) with:  
Enable bits for alarms  
Microprocessor control  
Single-bit RDI or enhanced 3-bit RDI (selectable through software control bit)  
Control of spare bits in K4 byte  
- N2 (Z6) byte  
Microprocessor or Tandem connection insertion with:  
Multiframe pattern generation  
16-byte message  
TC RDI, ODI generation with:  
Alarms and microprocessor control  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 7 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
TC AIS, REI and OEI generation  
- Unequipped channel generation with supervisory equipped generation  
- TU/VT AIS generator  
Desynchronizer  
- Meet ETSI and ANSI performance requirements for:  
Pointer test sequence  
Jitter  
- External clock (also used for line AIS generation)  
O-bit channel microprocessor access  
- For selected TU-12/VT2  
LINE INTERFACE:  
Individual port NRZ or rail interface selection  
NRZ interface  
- AIS detection  
- External loss of signal may be inputted on negative rail  
- Programmable clock edge  
Rail Interface  
- HDB3 CODEC  
- Bipolar violation counter (16 bits)  
- Loss of signal detection  
- AIS detection  
Quiet feature  
- Force receive output to 0  
High-Z feature  
TEST FEATURES:  
Boundary Scan based on IEEE 1149.1  
- EXTEST, SAMPLE, BYPASS test instructions  
Loopbacks per port  
- Facility  
- Line  
High-Z all output leads option  
BIP-2 error mask per port  
- Force inverted value continuous  
REI error mask per port  
- Force REI to be sent as a 1  
Pseudo-random test generator and analyzer per port  
- 215-1 pattern defined in O.151  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 8 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
MICROPROCESSOR INTERFACE:  
Split bus  
- Intel  
- Motorola  
Interrupt support  
- Positive, negative, or positive/negative alarm transition  
- Positive level option  
- Software polling registers  
- Mask bit alarm hierarchy  
- Hardware enable control bit  
- Hardware sense control  
Reset control bits  
- Hardware reset  
- Full software reset  
- Software reset for A and B bus alarms  
- Software reset per port  
- Counter reset per port  
- SPOT (internal processor) reset  
SPOT PROCESSOR:  
Microcode is supplied for initialization  
Downloaded through memory map  
Sanity alarms  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 9 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
BLOCK DIAGRAM  
STM-1/STS-3/STS-1  
TELECOM BUS SIDE  
2.048 Mbit/s  
TRIBUTARY SIDE  
EXTCK  
QUIETpn  
ADCLK  
ADSPE  
Repeated for Ports 1 through 16  
TU/VT  
Terminate  
A Side  
A Receive  
(A Drop)  
RPOpn  
RNOpn  
RCOpn  
ADC1J1V1  
12  
AD(7-0)  
HDB3  
Coder  
Destuff  
Desync  
8
ADPAR  
ADINDp  
Add/Drop  
4
TU/VT  
Terminate  
B Side  
B Receive  
(B Drop)  
Bus A  
Interface  
to  
Channel  
blocks  
#1-16  
SPOT RISC  
Processor  
and RAM  
Alarms & Controls  
AACLK  
AASPE  
AAC1J1V1  
AA(7-0)  
Alarms  
Controls,  
& Timing  
8
AAPAR  
AADDp  
AAINDp  
A Transmit  
(A Add)  
TU/VT Build  
A Side  
Stuff/Sync  
A Side  
3
4
4
11  
TPIpn  
HDB3  
Decoder  
TNIpn/TLOSpn  
TCIpn  
B Transmit  
(B Add)  
TU/VT Build  
B Side  
Stuff/Sync  
B Side  
BDCLK  
BDSPE  
Repeated for Ports 1 through 16  
BDC1J1V1  
BD(7-0)  
Note: p=1-4; n=1-4  
(16 Channel blocks)  
12  
8
BDPAR  
BDINDp  
Add/Drop  
4
TCK  
TDO  
Bus B  
Interface  
to  
Channel  
blocks  
#1-16  
Channel  
p
n
Channel  
p
n
Test  
Access Port  
Interface  
(Boundary  
Scan)  
T
A
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
9
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
TRS  
TDI  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
TMS  
BACLK  
BASPE  
RESET  
BAC1J1V1  
BA(7-0)  
HIGHZ  
ABUST  
TESTp  
8
BAPAR  
3
BADDp  
BAINDp  
11  
4
4
TESTp  
4
TXCTI(1-5)  
1
Microprocessor Interface and Common Control/Status I/O  
Note: p=1-4 (for four groups of four mappers)  
4
4
8
4
11  
D
(7-0)  
IRQp  
SELp  
LDS  
DTACKp  
INTSH  
A
MOTOROLA  
MOTO  
RD/WR  
(10-0)  
4
4
8
11  
4
D
(7-0)  
INTp  
SELp  
WR  
RDYp  
INTSH  
A
INTEL  
MOTO  
RD  
(10-0)  
Figure 1. TXC-04216 Block Diagram  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 10 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
BLOCK DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION  
The block diagram for the E1 Mapper 16-Channel device is shown in Figure 1. The E1Mx16 interfaces to four  
buses, designated as A Drop, B Drop, A Add, and B Add. The four buses run at the STM-1/STS-3 rate of 19.44  
Mbyte/s, or at the STS-1 rate of 6.48 Mbyte/s. For North American applications, the asynchronous E1 signals  
are carried in floating Virtual Tributary 2 (VT2) format in a Synchronous Transport Signal - 1 (STS-1), or in an  
STS-1 that is carried in a Synchronous Transport Signal - 3 (STS-3). For ITU-T applications, the E1 signals are  
carried in floating mode Tributary Unit - 12 (TU-12) format in the STM-1 Virtual Container - 4 structure (VC-4)  
using Tributary Unit Group - 3 (TUG-3), or in the STM-1 Virtual Container - 3 structure (VC-3) using Tributary  
Unit Group - 2 (TUG-2) mapping schemes. Sixteen E1 signals can be dropped from one bus (A Drop or B  
Drop), or from any combination of the two drop buses, to the E1 lines. Sixteen asynchronous E1 signals are  
converted into TU-12 or VT2 format and are added to either one or both of the add buses, depending upon the  
mode of operation. When the E1Mx16 is configured for drop bus timing, the add buses are, by definition, byte-  
synchronous and multiframe-synchronous with their like-named drop buses, but are delayed by one byte time  
because of internal processing. For example, if a byte in the STM-1 Virtual Container - 4 structure (VC-4) using  
a Tributary Unit Group - 3 (TUG-3) TU-12/VT2 is to be added to the A Add bus, the time of its placement on the  
bus is derived from the A Drop bus timing, and from software instructions specifying which TU/VT number is  
being dropped/added. When the device is configured for add bus timing, the add bus, parity, and add indicator  
signals are derived from the add clock, C1J1V1 and SPE signals.  
The A Receive block is identical to the B Receive block. The TU/VT Terminate block is repeated 32 times, two  
for each port (A and B sides). The Destuff, Desync, and HDB3 Coder blocks are repeated sixteen times, one  
for each port. The interface between a drop bus and Receive block consists of 12 input leads, and an optional  
output lead: a byte clock, byte-wide data, a C1J1 indicator which may be carrying a V1 indication making the  
signal a C1J1V1 indicator, an SPE indicator, and an odd parity lead for the last-named ten leads. Parity is  
selectable by control bits for even parity and for the data byte only. The output lead is an optional TU/VT select  
indicator signal. The Drop C1J1V1 signal is used in conjunction with the Drop SPE signal to determine the  
location of the various pulses. The C1 pulse identifies the location of the C1 byte when the SPE signal is low. A  
single J1 pulse identifies the starting location of the J1 byte in the VC-4 format, when the SPE signal is high.  
Three J1 pulses are provided for the STS-3 format, each identifying the starting location of the J1 byte in each  
of the STS-1 signals.  
The E1Mx16 can operate with a V1 pulse in the C1J1V1 signal, or it can use an internal H4 detector for deter-  
mining the location of the V1 pulse. The V1 pulse location is used to determine the location of the pointer byte  
V1. For STM-1 VC-4 operation, if the C1J1V1 signal is used, a single V1 pulse must occur during three drop  
bus clock cycles every four frames following the J1 pulse when the SPE signal is high. For STS-3 operation,  
three V1 pulses must be present every four frames. Each of the three V1 pulses must be present three clock  
cycles after the corresponding J1 pulse, when the SPE signal is high. For example, in a VC-4 signal, the J1  
pulse identifies the J1 byte location (defined as the starting location for the VC-4) in the POH bytes. In the next  
column (first clock cycle) all the rows are assigned as fixed stuff. Similarly, in the next column (second clock  
cycle) all the rows are assigned as fixed stuff. The next column (third clock cycle) defines the start of TUG-3 A.  
This column is where the V1 pulse occurs every four frames. However, the actual V1 byte location is six clock  
cycles after the V1 pulse.  
For STS-1 operation, one V1 pulse must be present if the C1J1V1 signal is used. The V1 pulse must occur on  
the next clock cycle after the J1 pulse, and when the SPE signal is high. The J1 pulse identifies the J1 byte  
location (defined as the starting location for the STS-1) in the POH bytes. In the next column (first clock cycle)  
the TUs start. Thus, the V1 pulse identifies the starting location of the first V1 byte in the signal. The rest of the  
V1 bytes for the 21 TU-12/VT2s are also aligned with respect to the V1 pulse.  
Each bus is monitored for parity errors, loss of clock, H4 multiframe alignment if selected, and an upstream  
SDH/SONET AIS indication. The E1Mx16 can monitor either the TOH E1 bytes or the H1/H2 bytes for an AIS  
indication. Which E1 byte and H1/H2 bytes are selected is a function of the TU/VT selected.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 11 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Each TU/VT Terminate block (A and B side) performs pointer processing based on the location of the V1 and  
V2 bytes. The pointer bytes are monitored for loss of pointer, TU AIS indication, and NDF. The pointer tracking  
process is based on the latest ETSI standard, which also meets ANSI/Bellcore requirements. Pointer incre-  
ments and decrements are also counted, and the SS-bits are monitored for the correct value. This block also  
monitors the various alarms found in the V5 and K4 (formerly known as Z7) bytes, including signal label mis-  
match detection, unequipped status detection, BIP-2 parity error detection and error counter, REI counter, and  
the three RDI indications. The E1Mx16 performs a 16-byte J2 trail trace comparison on the channels selected.  
For 64-byte messages, the bytes are stored in a memory map segment for a microprocessor read cycle. The  
device also provides the TU tandem connection feature and performs the 16-byte message comparison for the  
N2 (formerly known as Z6) byte message.  
A control bit for each port selects the TU/VT from either the A Drop or B Drop bus. The TU/VT is destuffed in  
the Destuff block using majority logic rules for the three sets of three justification control bits to determine if the  
two S-bits are data bits or frequency justification bits.  
The Desync block removes the effects on the E1 output of systemic jitter that might occur because of signal  
mappings and pointer movements in the network. The Desync block contains two parts, a pointer leak buffer,  
and an E1 loop buffer. The pointer leak buffer can accept up to five consecutive pointer movements, and can  
adjust the effect over time. The E1 Loop Buffer consists of a digital loop filter, which is designed to track the fre-  
quency of the received E1 signal and to remove both transmission and stuffing jitter.  
An option for each port provides either NRZ data, or an HDB3-encoded positive and negative rail signal for the  
E1 interface. Receive data (towards the E1 line), for all sixteen channels, can be clocked out on either rising or  
falling edges of the clock. In addition, control bits are provided for forcing the data and clock signals to a high  
impedance state (tri-state). A control lead is provided for forcing the output leads to the 0 state.  
In the add direction, the E1Mx16 accepts clock and either NRZ data or HDB3-encoded positive and negative  
rail signals. Data, for all sixteen channels, can be clocked in on either the falling or rising edge of the clock. In  
the NRZ mode, an external loss of clock indication input signal can be provided. For the rail signal, coding vio-  
lations are counted, and there is monitoring for loss of signal. An E1AIS detector is also provided.  
The data signal is written into a FIFO in one of the 32 Stuff/Sync blocks. Threshold modulation is used for the  
frequency justification process. Timing information from the drop bus or add bus is used to read the FIFO and  
perform the TU/VT justification process. This block permits tracking of an incoming E1 signal having an aver-  
age frequency offset as high as 120 ppm, and up to 1.5 UI of peak-to-peak jitter. Since the E1Mx16 supports a  
ring architecture, two sets of blocks are provided for each port. The TU/VT selection is the same for both  
blocks. A control bit, and transmit line alarms, can generate an E1AIS.  
The 32 TU/VT Build blocks format the TU/VT into a STS-1, STS-3 or STM-1 structure for the asynchronous  
2048 kbit/s signals, as shown in Figure 2. The pointer value carried in the V1 and V2 bytes is transmitted with  
a fixed value of 105. Transmit access is provided for the 8 overhead communications channel bits (O-bits) via  
the microprocessor. The microprocessor also writes the signal label, and the value of the J2 message, either  
as a 16-byte or a 64-byte message. The E1Mx16 provides the TU tandem connection feature for the TU,  
including the transmission of the 16-byte message and the various alarms associated with the tandem connec-  
tion feature. The device provides single-bit or 3-bit RDI using the V5 and K4 (Z7) bytes, respectively. Local  
alarms, or the microprocessor, can generate the remote payload, server, or connectivity defect indications. The  
Far End Block Error FEBE (REI) is inserted from the BIP-2 errors detected on the receive side, and BIP-2 par-  
ity is generated for the V5 byte. Control bits are provided for generating unequipped status, generating TU/VT  
AIS, and inserting REI and BIP-2 errors. The ability to generate Null Pointer Indicators (NPIs) is also provided  
for the STM-1 VC-4 format.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 12 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 2. 2048 kbit/s Asynchronous Mapping  
VC-12  
TU-12/VT2  
V5  
V1 (Pointer Byte)  
R R R R R R R R  
32 bytes  
(2048 kbit/s Data)  
35 bytes  
R R R R R R R R  
J2  
C1 C2 O O O O R R  
V2 (Pointer Byte)  
35 bytes  
32 bytes  
(2048 kbit/s Data)  
R R R R R R R R  
N2 (Z6)  
C1 C2 O O O O R R  
32 bytes  
V3 (Action)  
35 bytes  
(2048 kbit/s Data)  
I = Information  
R R R R R R R R  
K4 (Z7)  
O = Overhead communications  
Ct = Justification control  
Sq = Justification opportunity  
R = Fixed stuff (set to 0)  
C1 C2 R R R R R S1  
S2 I I I I I I I  
31 bytes  
V4 (Reserved)  
35 bytes  
(2048 kbit/s Data)  
R R R R R R R R  
140 Bytes  
REI  
500 µs  
Path Overhead  
144 Bytes  
(V5) Byte  
L1  
L2  
L3  
RDI  
BIP-2  
RFI  
Signal Label  
(FEBE)  
(FERF)  
BIT 1  
8
V1  
V2  
BIP-2 = Bit Interleaved Parity (2 bits)  
REI = Remote Error Indication  
(formerly FEBE, Far End  
Block Error Indication)  
RFI = Remote Failure Indication  
L1L2L3 = Signal Label  
RDI = Remote Defect Indication  
(formerly FERF, Far End  
NDF  
New Data Flag  
Normal = 0110, 1110, 0010, 0100 or 0111  
New = 1001, 0001, 1101, 1011 or 1000  
S1 S2  
I
D
I
D
I
D
I
D
I
D
Size  
S1S2 = 10  
Receive Failure Indication)  
Positive Justification = Invert five I-bits  
Negative Justification = Invert five D-bits  
Pointer Range = 0 - 139 decimal  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 13 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
The A Transmit block is identical to the B Transmit block. The interface between an add bus and a Transmit  
block consists of three input leads and eleven output leads, when the add bus timing mode is selected. The  
input leads are a byte clock, a C1J1V1 indicator, and an SPE indicator. The output leads are byte-wide data, a  
parity indicator, an add indicator, and an optional TU/VT selection indicator signal. The Add C1J1V1 signal is  
used in conjunction with the Add SPE signal to determine the location of the various pulses. An option is pro-  
vided in which the drop side V1 reference pulse, either from the drop bus C1J1V1 indicator or from the H4 mul-  
tiframe detector, may be used as the add side V1 reference pulse.  
When drop bus timing is selected, the output leads are byte-wide data, a parity indicator, an add indicator, and  
an optional TU/VT selection indicator signal. The add bus clock, SPE and C1J1V1 signals are disabled.  
The E1Mx16 can be configured to operate with either Intel or Motorola-compatible microprocessors via the  
Microprocessor Interface blocks. Separate address, data and control leads are provided. The microprocessor  
can access four separate segments of memory which have individual select, ready/acknowledge and interrupt  
leads, corresponding to the four groups of four mappers. Interrupt capability is provided with mapper group and  
individual mapper mask bits as well as activity registers to guide software to the exact cause of an interrupt in  
the most expeditious manner. A wide variety of alarms is provided on a mapper group level as well as on a per  
mapper channel level. Each alarm or error is reflected in a current status register or counter as well as a  
latched value register that may be set on the rising, falling, both transitions or positive level of an alarm. Any  
latched value may trigger an interrupt, unless it is masked to prevent it causing an interrupt. An option is pro-  
vided which permits the interrupt polarity to be inverted.  
Control bits are provided which enable an E1 facility or line loopback. Because of the complexity of the SDH/  
SONET interface and the two timing modes, SDH/SONET loopback of the TU/VTs is not supported.  
The SPOT (SONET Processor for Overhead Termination) block is a RISC processor with associated instruc-  
tion and data memory that performs selected low-speed functions, including all overhead processing and  
counter maintenance. The SPOT program must be loaded into the SPOT instruction memory after power-up.  
Executable microcode is provided by TranSwitch. All four SPOT blocks can be programmed at the same time  
by simultaneously activating all four SELp leads in write mode.  
The Boundary Scan Interface Block provides a five-lead Test Access Port (TAP) that conforms to the IEEE  
1149.1 standard. This standard provides external boundary scan functions to read and write the external I/O  
leads from the TAP for board and component test.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 14 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
LEAD DIAGRAM  
26  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
58  
58  
58  
58  
51  
51  
51  
51  
58  
58  
58  
58  
51  
51  
51  
51  
58  
58  
58  
58  
51  
51  
51  
51  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
58  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
58  
58  
58  
58  
51  
51  
51  
51  
58  
58  
58  
58  
51  
51  
51  
51  
58  
58  
58  
58  
51  
51  
51  
51  
3
2
1
AE  
AC  
AA Y W  
V
U
T
R
P
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
AF  
AD  
AB  
Notes: This is the bottom view. The leads are solder balls. See Figure 26 for package information.  
Figure 3. E1Mx16 TXC-04216 Lead Diagram  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 15 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
LEAD DESCRIPTIONS  
In the following tables the mapper-group identification variable pstands for (1-4), and the corresponding  
leads are listed in the order 1, 2, 3, 4.  
POWER SUPPLY, GROUND AND NO CONNECT  
Symbol  
Lead No.  
I/O/P * Type  
Name/Function  
+5 volt supply voltage, ±5%.  
VDD:  
VDD  
A2, A14, B26,  
C23, D3, L12,  
L13, L14, L15,  
M11, M16, N1,  
N11, N16, P11,  
P16, P26, R11,  
R16, T12, T13,  
T14, T15,  
P
AC24, AD4,  
AE1, AF13,  
AF25  
Ground:  
0 volt reference.  
GND  
A1, A13, A26,  
D4, D21, D22,  
D23, E4, F4,  
L11, L16, M12,  
M13, M14,  
P
M15, N12, N13,  
N14, N15, N26,  
P1, P12, P13,  
P14, P15 R12,  
R13, R14, R15,  
T11, T16,  
AA23, AB23,  
AC4, AC5, AC6,  
AC23, AF1,  
AF14, AF26  
Note: I = Input; O = Output; P = Power; T=Tristate  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 16 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Symbol  
Lead No.  
I/O/P * Type  
Name/Function  
NC leads are not to be connected, not even to  
another NC lead, but must be left floating. Connection of these  
leads may impair performance or cause damage to the device.  
No Connect:  
NC  
B7, C6, C7, C8,  
C17, C19, C20,  
D5, D6, D7,  
D17, D19, D20,  
E2, E3, F24,  
G24, J1, J2, K1,  
K2, K4, K23,  
L1, L3, L23, M3,  
M4, M23, M24,  
N3, N4, P2, P3,  
P23, R3, T2,  
T3, T23, U3,  
U4, U23, V3,  
V4, V23, V24,  
V25, W23,  
W24, Y23, Y24,  
Y25, AA24,  
AA25, AB4,  
AB24, AB25,  
AB26, AC1,  
AC2, AC13,  
AC14, AC15,  
AC21, AC22,  
AD1, AD5,  
AD6, AD13,  
AD14, AD21,  
AD23, AD24,  
AE6, AE21,  
AE24, AE25,  
AE26, AF2  
A DROP AND A ADD BUS I/O (p=1-4)  
Symbol Lead No. I/O/P Type *  
Name/Function  
A Drop Bus Clock:  
This clock operates at 19.44 MHz for STM-1/  
ADCLK  
R2  
I
TTL  
STS-3 operation, and at 6.48 MHz for STS-1 operation. A Drop bus  
byte-wide data (AD7-AD0), the parity bit (ADPAR), SPE indication  
(ADSPE), and the C1J1V1 indication (ADC1J1V1) are clocked in on  
falling edges of this clock. This clock may also be used for timing and  
deriving the like-named add bus byte-wide data, add and TU/VT indica-  
tions, and parity bits. The add bus signals are clocked out on rising  
edges of the clock during the time slots that correspond to the selected  
TU/VT.  
A Drop Bus Parity Bit:  
An odd parity bit input signal representing the  
ADPAR  
AF15  
I
TTL  
parity calculation for each data byte, SPE, and C1J1V1 signal from the  
drop bus. Control bits are provided in address 012H which enable par-  
ity to be calculated as even (control bit DPEp is 1), and/or for the data  
byte only (control bit PDDOp is 1).  
*See Input, Output and Input/Output Parameters section below for Type definitions.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 17 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Symbol Lead No. I/O/P Type *  
Name/Function  
Byte-wide data that corresponds to the  
STM-1/STS-3/STS-1 signal from the drop bus. The first bit received  
(dropped) corresponds to bit 7.  
A Drop Bus Data Byte:  
AD(7-0) AF3, AE3,  
AE4, AF4,  
AE5,  
I
TTL  
AE18,  
AF17,  
AF18  
A Drop Bus SPE Indicator:  
A signal that is active high during each  
byte of the STM-1/STS-3/STS-1 payload, and low during Transport  
Overhead times.  
ADSPE  
AC3  
AB2  
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
A Drop Bus C1J1V1 Indications:  
ADC1J1V1  
An active high timing signal that  
carries STM-1/STS-3/STS-1 starting frame and SPE information. This  
signal works in conjunction with the ADSPE signal. The C1 pulse iden-  
tifies the location of the first C1 byte in the STM-1/STS-3 signal, and  
the C1 byte in the STS-1 signal, when ADSPE is low. The J1 signal  
identifies the starting location of the J1 signal when ADSPE is high.  
One or more V1 pulses may be present depending upon the format.  
The V1 pulses may be used in place of the H4 byte as the multiframe  
indication.  
A Drop Bus TU/VT Selection Indication:  
Enabled when control bit  
G3, K3,  
AA2,  
AD16  
O
I
CMOS  
ADINDp  
AACLK  
4mA ADnENp is written with a 1. An active low signal that is clocked out for  
the time slots determined by TU/VT selection (RTUNnp register) for  
each port (n=port number, 1-4; p=group number, 1-4).  
A Add Bus Clock:  
When the add bus timing mode is selected, this  
N2  
TTL  
input must be provided for add bus timing. This clock operates at 19.44  
MHz for STM-1/STS-3 operation, and at 6.48 MHz for STS-1 operation.  
The add bus SPE indication (AASPE), and the C1J1V1 indication  
(AAC1J1V1) are clocked in on falling edges of this clock. Add bus byte-  
wide data (AA7-AA0), add indicator (AADDp), and parity bit (AAPAR)  
are clocked out on rising edges of the clock during the time slots that  
correspond to the selected TU/VT. When drop bus timing is selected,  
this input is disabled.  
A Add Bus Parity Bit:  
An odd parity output signal that is calculated  
AAPAR  
AA(7-0)  
AF19  
O(T) CMOS  
4mA over the byte-wide add data. This tristate lead is only active when there  
is data being added to the add bus. When control bit APEp is 1, even  
parity is calculated.  
A Add Bus Data Byte:  
Byte-wide data that corresponds to the  
4mA selected TU/VT.  
AF21,  
AF20,  
O(T) CMOS  
AF6, AE7,  
AF7, AD7,  
AC7, AE8  
A Add Bus SPE Indicator:  
When the add bus timing mode is selected,  
AASPE  
M1  
I
TTL  
this signal must be provided for add bus timing. This signal must be  
high during each byte of the STM-1/STS-3/STS-1 payload, and low  
during Transport Overhead byte times.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 18 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Symbol Lead No. I/O/P Type *  
Name/Function  
A Add Bus C1J1V1 Indications:  
When the add bus timing mode is  
AAC1J1V1  
AB1  
I
TTL  
selected, this signal must be provided for add bus timing. An active  
high timing signal that carries STM-1/STS-3/STS-1 starting frame and  
SPE information. This signal works in conjunction with the AASPE sig-  
nal. The C1 pulse identifies the location of the first C1 byte in the  
STM-1/STS-3 signal, and the C1 byte in the STS-1 signal, when  
AASPE is low. The J1 signal identifies the starting location of the J1  
signal when AASPE is high. The J1 signal identifies the location of the  
J1 byte. One or more V1 pulses may be present depending upon the  
format. The V1 pulses are used in place of the H4 byte as the multi-  
frame indication.  
A Add Bus TU/VT Selection Indication:  
Enabled when control bit  
H2, J3,  
AA3,  
AC16  
O
O
CMOS  
AAINDp  
AADDp  
4mA AAnENp is written with a 1. An active low signal that is clocked out for  
the time slots determined by TU/VT selection (TTUNnp register) for  
each port (n=port number, 1-4; p=group number, 1-4).  
A Add Bus Add Data Present Indicator:  
This normally active low sig-  
R4,AD26,  
AF5,  
CMOS  
4mA nal is present when output data to the A Add bus is valid. It identifies  
the location of all of the TU/VT time slots being selected. When control  
bit ADDIp is 1, the indicator is active high instead of active low.  
AE19  
B DROP AND B ADD BUS I/O (p=1-4)  
Symbol Lead No. I/O/P Type  
Name/Function  
B Drop Bus Clock:  
BDCLK  
P25  
I
TTL  
This clock operates at 19.44 MHz for STM-1/  
STS-3 operation, and at 6.48 MHz for STS-1 operation. B Drop bus  
byte-wide data (BD7-BD0), the parity bit (BDPAR), SPE indication  
(BDSPE), and the C1J1V1 indication (BDC1J1V1) are clocked in on  
falling edges of this clock. This clock may also be used for timing and  
deriving the like-named add bus byte-wide data, add and TU/VT indica-  
tions, and parity bits. The add bus signals are clocked out on rising  
edges of the clock during the time slots that correspond to the selected  
TU/VT.  
B Drop Bus Parity Bit:  
An odd parity bit input signal representing the  
BDPAR  
J23  
I
TTL  
parity calculation for each data byte, SPE, and C1J1V1 signal from the  
drop bus. Control bits are provided in address 012H which enable par-  
ity to be calculated as even (control bit DPEp is 1), and/or for the data  
byte only (control bit PDDOp is 1).  
B Drop Bus Data Byte:  
Byte-wide data that corresponds to the  
STM-1/STS-3/STS-1 signal from the drop bus. The first bit received  
(dropped) corresponds to bit 7.  
BD(7-0) J26, J25,  
J24, K26,  
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
K25, K24,  
L26, L25  
B Drop Bus SPE Indicator:  
A signal that is active high during each  
BDSPE  
H24  
byte of the STM-1/STS-3/STS-1 payload, and low during Transport  
Overhead times.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 19 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Symbol Lead No. I/O/P Type  
Name/Function  
B Drop Bus C1J1V1 Indications:  
BDC1J1V1  
H25  
I
TTL  
An active high timing signal that car-  
ries STM-1/STS-3/STS-1 starting frame and SPE information. This sig-  
nal works in conjunction with the BDSPE signal. The C1 pulse  
identifies the location of the first C1 byte in the STM-1/STS-3 signal,  
and the C1 byte in the STS-1 signal, when BDSPE is low. The J1 signal  
identifies the starting location of the J1 signal when BDSPE is high.  
One or more V1 pulses may be present depending upon the format.  
The V1 pulses may be used in place of the H4 byte as the multiframe  
indication.  
B Drop Bus TU/VT Selection Indication:  
Enabled when control bit  
L24, G26,  
AA26,  
Y26  
O
I
CMOS  
BDINDp  
BACLK  
4mA BDnENp is written with a 1. An active low signal that is clocked out for  
the time slots determined by TU/VT selection (RTUNnp register) for  
each port (n=port number, 1-4; p=group number, 1-4).  
B Add Bus Clock:  
When the add bus timing mode is selected, this  
M25  
TTL  
input must be provided for add bus timing. This clock operates at 19.44  
MHz for STM-1/STS-3 operation, and at 6.48 MHz for STS-1 operation.  
The add bus SPE indication (BASPE), and the C1J1V1 indication  
(BAC1J1V1) are clocked in on falling edges of this clock. Add bus byte-  
wide data (BA7-BA0), add indicator (BADDp), and parity bit (BAPAR)  
are clocked out on rising edges of the clock during the time slots that  
correspond to the selected TU/VT. When drop bus timing is selected,  
this input is disabled.  
B Add Bus Parity Bit:  
An odd parity output signal that is calculated  
BAPAR  
BA(7-0)  
AD25  
O(T) CMOS  
4mA over the byte-wide add data. This tristate lead is only active when there  
is data being added to the add bus. When control bit APEp is 1, even  
parity is calculated.  
B Add Bus Data Byte:  
Byte-wide data that corresponds to the  
4mA selected TU/VT.  
AE23,  
AF23,  
O(T) CMOS  
AE22,  
AF22,  
AD22,  
AF10,  
AF9, AF8  
B Add Bus SPE Indicator:  
When the add bus timing mode is selected,  
BASPE  
AC26  
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
this signal must be provided for add bus timing. This signal must be  
high during each byte of the STM-1/STS-3/STS-1 payload, and low  
during Transport Overhead byte times.  
B Add Bus C1J1V1 Indications:  
BAC1J1V1  
H26  
When the add bus timing mode is  
selected, this signal must be provided for add bus timing. An active high  
timing signal that carries STM-1/STS-3/STS-1 starting frame and SPE  
information. This signal works in conjunction with the BASPE signal.  
The C1 pulse identifies the location of the first C1 byte in the STM-1/  
STS-3 signal, and the C1 byte in the STS-1 signal, when BASPE is low.  
The J1 signal identifies the starting location of the J1 signal when  
BASPE is high. The J1 signal identifies the location of the J1 byte. One  
or more V1 pulses may be present depending upon the format. The V1  
pulses are used in place of the H4 byte as the multiframe indication.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 20 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Symbol Lead No. I/O/P Type  
Name/Function  
B Add Bus TU/VT Selection Indication:  
Enabled when control bit  
F23, G25,  
AF12,  
O
CMOS  
BAINDp  
4mA BAnENp is written with a 1. An active low signal that is clocked out for  
the time slots determined by TU/VT selection (TTUNnp register) for  
each port (n=port number, 1-4; p=group number, 1-4).  
W26  
B Add Bus Add Data Present Indicator:  
This normally active low sig-  
AC25,  
M26,  
AF11,  
AF24  
O
CMOS  
BADDp  
4mA nal is present when output data to the B Add bus is valid. It identifies  
the location of all of the TU/VT time slots being selected. When control  
bit ADDIp is 1, the indicator is active high instead of active low.  
GROUP p, PORT n LINE INTERFACE (p = 1-4; n = 1-4)  
Symbol Lead No. I/O/P Type  
RCOpn F3, B11, D1, O(T) CMOS  
Name/Function  
Receive Group p, Port n Output Clock:  
A 2.048 MHz clock output.  
A16, D16,  
D26, D12,  
C22, W2,  
4mA Data is normally clocked out on rising edges of this clock. When con-  
trol bit RCLKIp is 1, data is clocked out on falling edges of this clock.  
When control bit RnENp is 0, this lead is forced to a high impedance  
state.  
AC9, W1,  
AD9, AD18,  
U25, AE9, T25  
Note: RCO11 is lead F3, RCO12 is lead B11, RCO13 is lead D1,  
RCO14 is lead A16, RCO21 is lead D16, etc.  
Receive Group p, Port n Data Positive Rail or NRZ:  
RPOpn F1, C11, E1, O(T) CMOS  
When control  
B10, B16,  
E23, C15,  
D24, Y4,  
AE10, W3,  
AC8, AC12,  
T26, AC18,  
R26  
4mA bit BYPASnp is 0, positive rail data is provided on this lead. When  
control bit BYPASnp is 1, an NRZ signal is provided on this lead.  
When control bit RnENp is 0, this lead is forced to a high impedance  
state.  
Note: RPO11 is lead F1, RPO12 is lead C11, RPO13 is lead E1,  
RPO14 is lead B10, RPO21 is lead B16, etc.  
Receive Group p, Port n Data Negative Rail:  
When control bit  
RNOpn  
TCIpn  
TPIpn  
F2, D9, D2, O(T) CMOS  
B8, C16, E25,  
D13, D25, Y1,  
AD17, W4,  
AD8, AC17,  
T24, AE17,  
R24  
4mA BYPASnp is 0, negative rail data is provided on this lead. When con-  
trol bit RnENp is 0, or control bit BYPASnp is 1, this lead is forced to  
a high impedance state.  
Note: RNO11 is lead F2, RNO12 is lead D9, RNO13 is lead D2,  
RNO14 is lead B8, RNO21 is lead C16, etc.  
Transmit Group p, Port n Input Clock:  
A 2.048 MHz clock input.  
G1, C10, B2,  
B12, D8, E26,  
C14, C24, Y2,  
AD10, U1,  
AD11, AD15,  
U26, AC20,  
N25  
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
Data is normally clocked in on falling edges of this clock. When con-  
trol bit TCLKIp is 1, data is clocked in on the rising edges of this  
clock.  
Note: TCI11 is lead G1, TCI12 is lead C10, TCI13 is lead B2, TCI14  
is lead B12, TCI21 is lead D8, etc.  
Transmit Group p, Port n Data Positive Rail or NRZ:  
H3, C9, C2,  
B14, D18,  
When con-  
trol bit BYPASnp is 0, positive rail input data is provided on this lead.  
When control bit BYPASnp is 1, an NRZ signal is provided on this  
lead.  
Note: TPI11 is lead H3, TPI12 is lead C9, TPI13 is lead C2, TPI14 is  
lead B14, TPI21 is lead D18, etc.  
F26, H4, C26,  
AA4, AE12,  
V2, AD19,  
AF16, V26,  
AC19, R23  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 21 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Symbol  
Lead No.  
I/O/P Type  
I TTL  
Name/Function  
Transmit Group p, Port n Data Negative Rail/External Loss Of  
TNIpn/ H1, D10, C1,  
Signal:  
B13, C18,  
F25, B9, C25,  
AA1, AC11,  
V1, AD12,  
When control bit BYPASnp is 0, negative rail input data is  
TLOSpn  
provided on this lead. When control bit BYPASnp is 1, this lead may  
be used to input an active low external loss of signal indicator from  
the line interface device.  
AE16, W25,  
AD20, N24  
Note: TNI11/TLOS11 is lead H1, TNI12/TLOS12 is lead D10, TNI13/  
TLOS13 is lead C1, TNI14/TLOS14 is lead B13, TNI21/TLOS21 is  
lead C18, etc.  
Quiet Group p, Port n:  
A high forces the RPOpn and RNOpn leads  
to the 0 state for either a rail or NRZ interface, overriding control bit  
RnENp when it is 0. A low disables this feature.  
Note: QUIET11 is lead G2, QUIET12 is lead D11, QUIET13 is lead  
B1, QUIET14 is lead C12, QUIET21 is lead G4, etc.  
QUIETpn G2, D11, B1,  
C12, G4, E24,  
B15, B24, Y3,  
AC10, U2,  
I
TTL  
AE11, AE13,  
U24, AE20,  
N23  
MICROPROCESSOR BUS INTERFACE SELECTION  
Symbol Lead No. I/O/P Type  
Name/Function  
Motorola Mode  
MOTO  
R1  
I
TTL  
: Intel bus interface is selected when low. Motorola bus  
interface is selected when high. This selection modifies some bus inter-  
face lead functions, as described in the next section of this table.  
MICROPROCESSOR BUS INTERFACE - SPLIT BUS FOR MOTOROLA (M) OR INTEL (I) (p=1-4)  
Symbol Lead No. I/O/P  
A(10-0) A15, C3,  
Type  
Name/Function  
Address Bus:  
I
TTL  
These address line inputs are used for accessing an  
B3, A3, (Note 1) (Note 1) E1Mx16 memory location for a read/write cycle. A10 is the most sig-  
A4, C5,  
B20, A7,  
A20, B21,  
A8  
nificant bit. High is logic 1.  
Data Bus:  
Bidirectional data lines used for transferring data to or  
8mA from an E1Mx16 memory location. D7 is the most significant bit.  
High is logic 1.  
D(7-0) C21, B22,  
A22, A9,  
I/O  
TTL  
A23, B23,  
A24, A10  
Select:  
A low enables data transfers between the microprocessor  
and a group p address of the E1Mx16 memory during a read/write  
cycle. Only one SELp lead may be held low for a read cycle.  
A6, A19,  
P4, B18  
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
SELp  
Read (I mode) or Read/Write (M mode):  
Intel Mode - An active low signal generated by the microprocessor  
for reading the E1Mx16 memory locations.  
D14  
RD /  
RD/WR  
Motorola Mode - An active high signal generated by the micropro-  
cessor for reading the E1Mx16 memory locations. An active low sig-  
nal is used to write to memory locations.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 22 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Symbol Lead No. I/O/P  
Type  
Name/Function  
Write (I mode) or Device Select (M mode):  
Intel Mode - An active low signal generated by the microprocessor  
for writing to the E1Mx16 memory locations.  
D15  
I
TTL  
WR /  
LDS  
Motorola Mode - The SELp and LDS inputs are logically OR-gated  
inside the E1Mx16, generating an internal active low select signal  
(CS) that is similar to SELp. This internal signal is used to enable  
data transfer. This lead can be used for the interface with the Motor-  
ola 68302 microprocessor. If it is not used, it should be tied to  
ground, so that CS is the same signal as SELp.  
Ready (I mode) or Data Transfer Acknowledge (M mode):  
A11, A25,  
A17, P24  
O(T)  
TTL  
RDYp/  
8mA Intel Mode - A high is an acknowledgment from the addressed group  
p E1Mx16 memory location that the transfer can be completed. A  
low indicates that the Mapper cannot complete the transfer cycle,  
and that microprocessor wait states must be generated for that  
group.  
DTACKp  
Motorola Mode - During a read bus cycle, a low signal indicates that  
the information on the data bus is valid. During a write bus cycle, a  
low signal acknowledges the acceptance of data. This lead is  
tristated.  
Interrupt:  
When INTSH is high, a high on this output lead signals an  
INTp / B5, B17,  
O(T)  
I
TTL  
J4, G23  
8mA interrupt request INTp to the microprocessor, as required for Intel.  
When INTSH is low, a low signals an interrupt request IRQp to the  
microprocessor, as required for Motorola.  
IRQp  
Interrupt Sense High:  
Interrupt polarity select. A high on this lead  
INTSH  
A18  
TTL  
causes the interrupt sense to be high when an interrupt occurs. A  
low causes the interrupt sense to be low when an interrupt occurs.  
This lead must be set to meet the interrupt polarity requirement of  
the microprocessor.  
Note 1: Leads A(10-0) are implemented as I/O type TTL 4mA to support production tests but are used as TTL inputs.  
CONTROLS, EXTERNAL CLOCK AND TEST LEADS (p=1-4  
Symbol Lead No. I/O/P Type  
)
Name/Function  
TranSwitch Test Leads:  
TESTp A12, B25,  
M2, R25  
I
I
I
I
CMOS  
TTLp  
TTL  
A low must be placed on these leads.  
TranSwitch Test Leads:  
internal pull-up to VDD. They must be left floating or held high.  
B6, B19,  
T4, H23  
These leads are pulled high internally by an  
TESTp  
TranSwitch Test Leads:  
tion.  
TXCTI1  
TXCTI2  
A5,  
T1  
These leads must be tied low for proper opera-  
TranSwitch Test Leads:  
to another lead and must be left floating. Connection of these leads may  
impair performance or cause damage to the device.  
TXCTI3  
TXCTI4  
TXCTI5  
L4,  
AD2,  
AE15  
TTLp  
These leads are not to be connected, not even  
External Reference Clock:  
This clock is used for desynchronizer opera-  
EXTCK  
C13  
I
CMOS  
tion and other purposes. The clock frequency must be 58.32 MHz (± 30  
ppm over life) and the clock duty cycle must be (50 ± 10) %.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 23 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Symbol Lead No. I/O/P Type  
Name/Function  
When an active low pulse is applied to this lead for a  
Hardware Reset:  
B4  
I
TTL  
RESET  
minimum duration of 150 nanoseconds after power is applied, this pulse  
clears all performance counters and alarms, resets the control bits  
(except those bits that force a high impedance state for the add buses),  
and initializes the internal FIFOs and internal SPOT processor. The  
microprocessor must write the control bit states for normal operation.  
High Impedance Select:  
A21  
C4  
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
A low forces all output leads to the high imped-  
ance state for testing purposes (except TDO).  
Add Bus Timing Select:  
HIGHZ  
ABUST  
A low selects the A and B Add bus clock, SPE  
and C1J1V1 input signals for deriving timing for the A and B Add buses. A  
high selects the like-named drop bus for deriving timing (e.g., A Drop bus  
for A Add bus). This control lead is disabled for group p when a 1 is writ-  
ten to control bit SBTENp. Control bit DRPBTp then makes the timing  
source selection for group p.  
BOUNDARY SCAN INTERFACE SIGNALS  
Symbol Lead No. I/O/P Type  
Name/Function  
IEEE 1149 1 Test Port Serial Scan Clock:  
This signal is used to shift  
TCK  
AE2  
I
TTL  
.
data into TDI on the rising edge, and out of TDO on the falling edge. The  
maximum clock frequency is 10 MHz.  
IEEE 1149.1 Test Port Mode Select:  
TMS  
AD3  
I
TTLp  
TMS is sampled on the rising edge  
of TCK, and is used to place the Test Access Port controller into various  
states as defined in IEEE 1149.1. This lead is set high internally by an  
internal pull-up to VDD for normal framer operation.  
IEEE 1149.1 Test Port Serial Scan Data In:  
TDI  
L2  
I
TTLp  
Serial test instructions and  
data are clocked into this lead on the rising edge of TCK. This input has  
an internal pull-up to VDD  
IEEE 1149.1 Test Port Serial Scan Data Out:  
Serial test instructions and  
.
TDO  
AE14  
AB3  
O(T) TTL  
4mA data are clocked out of this lead on the falling edge of TCK. When inactive,  
this 3-state output will be put into its high impedance state.  
IEEE 1149.1 Test Port Reset Lead:  
This lead will asynchronously reset  
I
TTLp  
TRS  
the Test Access Port (TAP) controller. This lead is to be held low, asserted  
low or pulsed low (for a minimum duration of 20 ns) to reset the TAP con-  
troller on E1Mx16 power-up. This input has an internal pull-up to VDD  
.
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 24 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS AND ENVIRONMENTAL LIMITATIONS  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
Conditions  
Supply voltage  
VDD  
VIN  
TS  
-0.5  
-0.5  
-55  
-40  
+6.0  
VDD + 0.5  
150  
V
V
oC  
oC  
oC x s  
Note 1  
Note 1  
DC input voltage  
Storage temperature range  
Ambient Operating Temperature  
Component Temperature x Time  
Moisture Exposure Level  
Note 1  
TA  
85  
0 ft/min linear airflow  
Note 1  
TI  
270 x 5  
ME  
5
Level  
per EIA/JEDEC  
JESD22-A112-A  
Relative Humidity, during assembly  
Relative Humidity  
ESD Classification  
LATCH-UP  
RH  
RH  
30  
0
60  
%
%
V
Note 2  
non-condensing  
Note 3  
100  
ESD  
LU  
absolute value 1500  
Meets JEDEC 78  
Notes:  
1. Conditions exceeding the Min or Max values may cause permanent failure. Exposure to conditions near the Min or Max  
values for extended periods may impair device reliability.  
2. Pre-assembly storage in non-drypack conditions is not recommended. Please refer to the instructions on the  
"CAUTION" label on the drypack bag in which devices are supplied.  
3. Test method for ESD per MIL-STD-883D, Method 3015.7.  
THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
Thermal resistance:  
15  
oC/W  
0 ft/min linear airflow  
junction to ambient  
POWER REQUIREMENTS  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
VDD  
4.75  
5.0  
280  
5.25  
310  
V
IDD  
mA  
mW  
mA  
mW  
STS-1  
Power dissipation, PDD  
IDD  
1400  
310  
1627  
340  
STS-1  
STM-1 or STS-3  
STM-1 or STS-3  
Power dissipation, PDD  
1550  
1785  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 25 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
INPUT, OUTPUT AND INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS  
INPUT PARAMETERS  
Input Parameters For CMOS  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
VIH  
VIL  
0.7 x VDD  
V
V
4.75 < VDD < 5.25  
4.75 < VDD < 5.25  
0.3 x VDD  
Input capacitance (leads TESTp)  
Input capacitance (lead EXTCK)  
7.5  
30  
pF  
pF  
Input Parameters For TTL  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
VIH  
VIL  
2.0  
V
V
4.75 < VDD < 5.25  
4.75 < VDD < 5.25  
0.8  
Input capacitance (leads TCIpn,  
TPIpn, TNIpn/TLOSpn, QUIETpn  
and SELp)  
7.5  
30  
pF  
Input capacitance (all other leads)  
pF  
Input Parameters For TTLp  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
VIH  
VIL  
2.0  
V
V
4.75 < VDD < 5.25  
4.75 < VDD < 5.25  
0.8  
Input capacitance  
(leads TDI, TESTp, TXCTI3,  
TXCTI4 and TXCTI5)  
7.5  
70  
pF  
Input resistance  
kΩ  
(leads TDI, TESTp, TXCTI3,  
TXCTI4 and TXCTI5)  
Input capacitance  
(all other leads)  
30  
pF  
Input resistance  
(all other leads)  
17.5  
kΩ  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 26 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
OUTPUT PARAMETERS  
Output Parameters For CMOS 4mA  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
VOH  
VOL  
IOL  
VDD - 0.7  
V
V
VDD = 4.75; IOH = -4.0  
VDD = 4.75; IOL = 4.0  
0.4  
4.0  
mA  
mA  
pF  
IOH  
-4.0  
Input capacitance (leads AAPAR,  
AA(7-0), BAPAR and BA(7-0))  
30  
Input capacitance (all other leads)  
7.5  
pF  
Output Parameters For TTL 4mA  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
VOH  
2.4  
V
V
VDD = 4.75; IOH = -4.0  
VDD = 4.75; IOL = 4.0  
VOL  
0.4  
4.0  
IOL  
mA  
mA  
pF  
IOH  
-4.0  
Input capacitance  
7.5  
Output Parameters For TTL 8mA  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
VOH  
2.4  
V
V
VDD = 4.75; IOH = -8.0  
VDD = 4.75; IOL = 8.0  
VOL  
0.4  
8.0  
IOL  
mA  
mA  
pF  
IOH  
-8.0  
Input capacitance  
7.5  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 27 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
INPUT/OUTPUT PARAMETERS  
Input/Output Parameters For TTL 4mA  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
VIH  
VIL  
2.0  
V
V
4.75 < VDD < 5.25  
4.75 < VDD < 5.25  
VDD = 4.75; IOH = -4.0  
VDD = 4.75; IOL = 4.0  
0.8  
VOH  
VOL  
IOL  
2.4  
V
0.4  
4.0  
V
mA  
mA  
pF  
IOH  
-4.0  
Input capacitance  
30  
Input/Output Parameters For TTL 8mA  
Parameter Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Test Conditions  
VIH  
VIL  
2.0  
V
V
4.75 < VDD < 5.25  
4.75 < VDD < 5.25  
VDD = 4.75; IOH = -8.0  
VDD = 4.75; IOL = 8.0  
0.8  
VOH  
VOL  
IOL  
2.4  
V
0.4  
8.0  
V
mA  
mA  
pF  
IOH  
-8.0  
Input capacitance  
30  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 28 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
TIMING CHARACTERISTICS  
Detailed timing diagrams for the E1Mx16 device are illustrated in Figures 4 through 14, with values of the tim-  
ing intervals tabulated below the waveform diagrams. The tristate condition of a signal waveform is shown as  
midway between high and low. The timing parameters are measured at voltage levels of (VIH + VIL)/2 for input  
signals or (VOH + VOL)/2 for output signals, unless otherwise indicated. Where a waveform diagram describes  
both A and B bus signals, their symbols are combined in labeling the waveform (e.g., A/BADDp for AADDp and  
BADDp).  
Figure 4. Groups 1-4, Ports 1-4 E1 Transmit Timing  
tCYC  
tPWH  
tPWL  
TCIpn  
(Input)  
tSU  
tH  
TPIpn/TNIpn  
(Input)  
Note: p = 1 - 4 identifies a group of four ports  
n = 1 - 4 identifies one of four ports  
Notes:  
1. TCIpn is shown for TCLKIp = 0, where data is clocked in on falling edges. Data is clocked in on rising edges when  
TCLKIp =1.  
2. For NRZ operation, TNIpn is not used for data input and may instead be used as the input for an external active low  
loss of signal indication TLOSpn. Otherwise, this lead must be held high.  
Parameter  
TCIpn clock period  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
tCYC  
tPWL  
tPWH  
tSU  
488.28  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
TCIpn clock low time  
150  
150  
10  
TCIpn clock high time  
TPIpn/TNIpn data setup time before TCIpn↓  
TPIpn/TNIpn data hold time after TCIpn↓  
tH  
3.0  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 29 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 5. Groups 1-4, Ports 1-4 E1 Receive Timing  
tCYC  
tPWL  
tPWH  
RCOpn  
(Output)  
tOD  
RPOpn/RNOpn  
(Output)  
Note: p = 1 - 4 identifies a group of four ports  
n = 1 - 4 identifies one of four ports  
Note: RCOpn is shown for RCLKIp=0, where data is clocked out on rising edges. Data is clocked out on falling edges when  
RCLKIp=1.  
Parameter  
RCOpn clock period  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
tCYC  
tPWL  
tPWH  
tPWL  
tPWH  
tOD  
480  
498  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
RCOpn clock low time (RCLKIp = 0)  
RCOpn clock high time (RCLKIp = 0)  
RCOpn clock low time (RCLKIp = 1)  
RCOpn clock high time (RCLKIp = 1)  
RPOpn/RNOpn data delay after RCOpn↑  
257  
222  
222  
241  
241  
257  
2.0  
5.0  
Note: All output times are measured with a maximum 75 pF load capacitance.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 30 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 6. STS-1 A/B Drop and Add Bus Signals, Timing Derived from Drop Bus  
t
CYC  
t
PWH  
A/BDCLK  
(Input)  
t
t
t
SU(1)  
H(1)  
A/BD(7-0)  
A/BDPAR  
(Input)  
TU/VT  
Selected  
A1  
A2  
C1  
Data  
Data  
J1  
Data  
Data  
t
SU(2)  
t
H(2)  
A/BDSPE  
(Input)  
Occurs every four frames  
when provided in place  
of the H4 byte  
t
SU(3)  
H(3)  
A/BDC1J1V1  
(Input)  
C1  
J1  
V1  
Drop Bus TU/VT Time Slot when enabled  
t
D(1)  
A/BDINDp  
(Output)  
t
OD(3)  
t
OD(2)  
A/BA(7-0)  
A/BAPAR  
(Output)  
TU/VT  
Selected  
t
OD(5)  
t
OD(1)  
A/BADDp  
(Output)  
Add Bus TU/VT Time Slot when enabled  
t
OD(4)  
A/BAINDp  
(Output)  
Note: For illustration purposes, a single TU/VT (TU number 21) is shown. The V1 pulse may or may not be present. If it is  
not present, the H4 byte must be provided. An additional byte time of delay in A/BA(7-0) is provided when control bit  
ABDp is written with a 1. The table omits A/B parameter prefixes. p=1-4 in both the table and figure. DSPE edges are  
at payload boundaries.  
Parameter  
Symbol Load  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
DCLK clock period  
DLCK duty cycle tPWH CYC  
tCYC  
154.32  
50  
ns  
%
/t  
40  
10  
60  
D(7-0)/DPAR data /parity setup time before DCLK↓  
D(7-0)/DPAR data /parity hold time after DCLK↓  
DSPE setup time before DCLK↓  
tSU(1)  
tH(1)  
tSU(2)  
tH(2)  
tSU(3)  
tH(3)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
5.0  
10  
DSPE hold time after DCLK↓  
5.0  
10  
DC1J1V1 setup time before DCLK↓  
DC1J1V1 hold time after DCLK↓  
5.0  
7.0  
9.0  
8.0  
9.0  
9.0  
7.0  
DINDp drop bus indication output delay from DCLK↑  
A(7-0)/APAR data /parity out valid delay from DCLK↑  
A(7-0)/APAR data /parity to tristate delay from DCLK↑  
ADDp add indicator delay from DCLK↑  
tD(1)  
10 pF  
45 pF  
30  
39  
20  
30  
30  
9.0  
tOD(2)  
tOD(3)  
tOD(1)  
tOD(4)  
tOD(5)  
10 pF  
45 pF  
AINDp add bus indication output delay from DCLK↑  
A(7-0)/APAR data /parity out tristate to driven delay  
from DCLK↑  
Note: All output times are measured with the specified load capacitance.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 31 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 7. STM-1/STS-3 A/B Drop and Add Bus Signals, Timing Derived from Drop Bus  
t
CYC  
t
PWH  
A/BDCLK  
(Input)  
tSU(1)  
tH(1)  
A/BD(7-0)  
A/BDPAR  
(Input)  
TU/VT  
Selected  
J1 Byte  
STS-1 #1  
Data  
STS-1 #1  
C1(1)  
C1(2)  
C1(3)  
Data  
STS-1 #2  
STS-1 #3  
t
SU(2)  
t
H(2)  
A/BDSPE  
(Input)  
Occurs every four frames  
when provided in place  
of the H4 byte  
tSU(3)  
tH(3)  
A/BDC1J1V1  
(Input)  
C1(1)  
J1 STS-1 #1 J1 STS-1 #2 J1 STS-1 #3 V1 STS-1 #1  
Drop Bus TU/VT Time Slot selected when enabled  
t
D(1)  
A/BDINDp  
(Output)  
t
OD(2)  
t
OD(3)  
A/BA(7-0)  
APAR  
(Output)  
TU/VT  
Selected  
t
OD(5)  
t
OD(1)  
A/BADDp  
(Output)  
Add Bus TU/VT Time Slot  
selected when enabled  
t
OD(4)  
A/BAINDp  
(Output)  
Note: A single TU/VT is shown for illustration purposes. It also shows the TU/VT selection for the drop bus and add bus  
(number 21 in STS-1 number 3). The format is an AU-3/STS-3. For VC-4 operation, one J1 pulse and one optional  
V1 pulse are present. An additional byte time of delay in A/BA(7-0) is provided when control bit ABDp is written with  
a 1. The table omits A/B parameter prefixes. p=1-4 in both the table and figure. DSPE edges are at payload bound-  
aries.  
Parameter  
Symbol Load  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
DCLK clock period  
DCLK duty cycle tPWH CYC  
tCYC  
51.44  
50  
ns  
%
/t  
40  
10  
60  
D(7-0)/DPAR data /parity setup time before DCLK↓  
D(7-0)/DPAR data /parity hold time after DCLK↓  
DSPE setup time before DCLK↓  
tSU(1)  
tH(1)  
tSU(2)  
tH(2)  
tSU(3)  
tH(3)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
5.0  
10  
DSPE hold time after DCLK↓  
5.0  
10  
DC1J1V1 setup time before DCLK↓  
DC1J1V1 hold time after DCLK↓  
5.0  
7.0  
9.0  
8.0  
9.0  
9.0  
7.0  
DINDp drop bus indication output delay from DCLK↑  
A(7-0)/APAR data /parity out valid delay from DCLK↑  
A(7-0)/APAR data /parity to tristate delay from DCLK↑  
ADDp add indicator delay from DCLK↑  
tD(1)  
10 pF  
45 pF  
30  
39  
20  
30  
30  
9.0  
tOD(2)  
tOD(3)  
tOD(1)  
tOD(4)  
tOD(5)  
10 pF  
45 pF  
AINDp add bus indication output delay from DCLK↑  
A(7-0)/APAR data /parity out tristate to driven delay from  
DCLK↑  
Note: All output times are measured with the specified load capacitance.  
- 32 -  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 8. STS-1 A/B Add Bus Signals, Timing Derived from Add Bus  
t
CYC  
t
PWH  
A/BACLK  
(Input)  
t
SU(2)  
t
H(2)  
A/BASPE  
(Input)  
Occurs every four frames  
when provided  
t
t
H(1)  
SU(1)  
A/BAC1J1V1  
(Input)  
C1  
J1  
V1  
t
OD(2)  
t
OD(3)  
A/BA(7-0)  
A/BAPAR  
(Output)  
TU/VT  
Selected  
t
OD(5)  
t
OD(1)  
A/BADDp  
(Output)  
Add Bus TU/VT Time Slot when enabled  
t
OD(4)  
A/BAINDp  
(Output)  
Note: For illustration purposes, a single TU/VT is shown. The location of this TU/VT corresponds to TU/VT number 21. An  
additional byte time of delay in A/BA(7-0) is provided when control bit ABDp is written with a 1. The table omits A/B  
parameter prefixes. p=1-4 in both the table and figure. ASPE edges are at payload boundaries.  
Symbo  
Parameter  
Load  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
l
ACLK clock period  
tCYC  
154.32  
50  
ns  
%
ACLK duty cycle, tPWH/tCYC  
40  
10  
60  
AC1J1V1 setup time before ACLK↓  
tSU(1)  
tH(1)  
tSU(2)  
tH(2)  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
AC1J1V1 hold time after ACLK↓  
5.0  
10  
ASPE setup time before ACLK↓  
ASPE hold time after ACLK↓  
5.0  
7.0  
7.0  
7.0  
7.0  
5.0  
A(7-0)/APAR data /parity out valid delay from ACLK↑  
A(7-0)/APAR data /parity to tristate delay from ACLK↑  
ADDp add indicator delay from ACLK ↑  
AINDp add bus indication output delay from ACLK↑  
tOD(2)  
tOD(3)  
tOD(1)  
tOD(4)  
31  
16  
24  
24  
7.0  
45 pF  
10 pF  
A(7-0)/APAR data /parity out tristate to driven delay from tOD(5) 45 pF  
ACLK↑  
Note: All output times are measured with the specified load capacitance.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 33 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 9. STM-1/STS-3 A/B Add Bus Signals, Timing Derived from Add Bus  
t
CYC  
t
PWH  
A/BACLK  
(Input)  
t
SU(2)  
t
H(2)  
A/BASPE  
(Input)  
Occurs every four frames  
tSU(1)  
tH(1)  
when enabled  
A/BAC1J1V1  
(Input)  
C1(1)  
J1 STS-1 #1 J1 STS-1 #2 J1 STS-1 #3 V1 STS-1 #1 V1 STS-1 #2 V1 STS-1 #3  
t
t
OD(2)  
t
OD(3)  
A/BA(7-0)  
A/BAPAR  
(Output)  
TU/VT  
Selected  
OD(5)  
OD(1)  
t
A/BADDp  
(Output)  
Add Bus TU/VT Time Slot  
selected when enabled  
t
OD(4)  
A/BAINDp  
(Output)  
Note: A single TU/VT is shown for illustration purposes. It also shows the TU/VT selection for the drop bus and add bus  
(number 21 in STS-1 number 3). The format is an AU-3/STS-3. For VC-4 operation, one J1 pulse and one optional  
V1 pulse are present. An additional byte time of delay in A/BA(7-0) is provided when control bit ABDp is written with  
a 1. The table omits A/B parameter prefixes. p=1-4 in both the table and figure. ASPE edges are at payload bound-  
aries.  
Symbo  
Parameter  
Load  
Min  
Typ  
Max Unit  
l
ACLK clock period  
tCYC  
51.44  
50  
ns  
ACLK duty cycle, tPWH/tCYC  
40  
10  
60  
%
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
AC1J1V1 setup time before ACLK↓  
tSU(1)  
tH(1)  
tSU(2)  
tH(2)  
AC1J1V1 hold time after ACLK↓  
5.0  
10  
ASPE setup time before ACLK↓  
ASPE hold time after ACLK↓  
5.0  
7.0  
7.0  
7.0  
7.0  
5.0  
A(7-0)/APAR data /parity out valid delay from ACLK↑  
A(7-0)/APAR data /parity to tristate delay from ACLK↑  
ADDp add indicator delay from ACLK↑  
AINDp add bus indication output delay from ACLK↑  
tOD(2)  
tOD(3)  
tOD(1)  
tOD(4)  
31  
16  
31  
31  
7.0  
45 pF  
10 pF  
A(7-0)/APAR data /parity out tristate to driven delay from tOD(5) 45 pF  
ACLK↑  
Note: All output times are measured with the specified load capacitance.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 34 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 10. Microprocessor Read Cycle Timing - Intel  
tH(1)  
A(10-0)  
(Input)  
Address  
tD(5)  
Data  
tF(1)  
D(7-0)  
(Output)  
tSU(1)  
tD(1)  
SELp  
(Input)  
tSU(2)  
tH(2)  
tPW(1)  
RD  
(Input)  
tD(3)  
tF(2)  
tD(4)  
tD(2)  
RDYp  
(Output)  
tPW(2)  
Note: p=1-4 in both the table and figure.  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Address setup time to SELp↓  
tSU(1)  
tH(1)  
0.0  
3.0  
2.0  
10  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Address hold time after RD↑  
Data output float time after RD↑  
SELpsetup time to RD↓  
RD pulse width  
tF(1)  
11  
tSU(2)  
tPW(1)  
tH(2)  
40  
SELphold time after RD↓  
RDYpdelay after SELp↓  
RDYpdelay after RD↓  
RDYp float time after SELp↑  
0.0  
2.0  
4.0  
2.0  
tD(2)  
10  
20  
tD(3)  
tF(2)  
10  
Register read  
tPW(2)  
0.0  
RDYp pulse width  
SPOT instruction read (Note 2)  
Data RAM read (Note 3)  
6 x SPcyc  
9 x SPcyc  
7 x SPcyc  
33 x SPcyc ns  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 35 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Data output valid delay Register read only  
tD(1)  
8.0  
28  
ns  
after RD↓  
Data output valid delay SPOT instruction read and data  
after RDYpRAM read only  
tD(4)  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
Data output tristate to driven delay after RD↓  
tD(5)  
2.0  
Notes:  
1. All output times are measured with a maximum 75 pF load capacitance.  
2. One SPcyc equals two EXTCK clock cycles.  
(The EXTCK clock frequency is 58.32 MHz. One SPcyc is about 34.29 ns.)  
3. Excessive external microprocessor data RAM access could interfere with the E1Mx16 internal data processing, result-  
ing in data corruption. To prevent such a situation, when excessive external microprocessor data RAM access is  
detected, E1Mx16 tries to slow down the external microprocessor access rate by lengthening the RDYp pulse width to  
as high as 97 x SPcyc. To avoid such delays the following are TranSwitch recommendations for access frequency for  
each of the four E1Mx16 SPOT data RAM (addresses are shaded in the memory map at the end of the data sheet).  
a. For each group selected (via SELp) use 16 wait states for a read or write access if the RDYp signal is not being  
used. Forcing a longer wait state for every access may create unwanted delays in the internal process for the  
E1Mx16. Using the 16 wait states will provide reliability without causing excessive process delays (at the 25  
MHz microprocessor frequency). For other frequencies, use an equivalent number of wait states that equals  
approximately 640 ns.  
b. For each group selected (via SELp) maintain no more than 16 microprocessor accesses per 125 µs frame  
period.  
c. For each group selected (via SELp) maintain a minimum of 600 ns between microprocessor accesses.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 36 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 11. Microprocessor Write Cycle Timing - Intel  
tH(1)  
A(10-0)  
(Input)  
Address  
tH(2)  
D(7-0)  
(Input)  
Data  
tSU(2)  
tSU(1)  
tSU(4)  
SELp  
(Input)  
tSU(3)  
tPW(1)  
WR  
(Input)  
tD(1)  
tD(2)  
tF  
RDYp  
(Output)  
tPW(2)  
Note: p=1-4 in both the table and figure.  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Address setup time to SELp↓  
Address hold time after WR↑  
Data input valid setup time to WR↑  
Data input hold time after WR↑  
SELp setup time to WR↓  
WR pulse width  
tSU(1)  
tH(1)  
tSU(2)  
tH(2)  
tSU(3)  
tPW(1)  
tD(1)  
tD(2)  
tF  
0.0  
3.0  
12  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
6.0  
10  
40  
RDYpdelay after SELp↓  
RDYpdelay after WR↓  
2.0  
4.0  
2.0  
10  
20  
10  
RDYp float time after SELp↑  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 37 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Register write  
tPW(2)  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
RDYp pulse width  
SPOT instruction write (Note 2)  
Data RAM write (Note 3)  
5 x SPcyc  
9 x SPcyc  
7 x SPcyc  
29 x SPcyc ns  
ns  
Data valid setup time SPOT instruction write and data  
tSU(4) -1 x SPcyc  
to WR↓  
RAM write only  
Notes:  
1. All output times are measured with a maximum 75 pF load capacitance.  
2. One SPcyc equals two EXTCK clock cycles.  
(The EXTCK clock frequency is 58.32 MHz. One SPcyc is about 34.29 ns.)  
3. Excessive external microprocessor data RAM access could interfere with the E1Mx16 internal data processing, result-  
ing in data corruption. To prevent such a situation, when excessive external microprocessor data RAM access is  
detected, E1Mx16 tries to slow down the external microprocessor access rate by lengthening the RDYp pulse width to  
as high as 97 x SPcyc. To avoid such delays the following are TranSwitch recommendations for access frequency for  
each of the four E1Mx16 SPOT data RAM (addresses are shaded in the memory map at the end of the data sheet).  
a. For each group selected (via SELp) use 16 wait states for a read or write access if the RDYp signal is not being  
used. Forcing a longer wait state for every access may create unwanted delays in the internal process for the  
E1Mx16. Using the 16 wait states will provide reliability without causing excessive process delays (at the 25  
MHz microprocessor frequency). For other frequencies, use an equivalent number of wait states that equals  
approximately 640 ns.  
b. For each group selected (via SELp) maintain no more than 16 microprocessor accesses per 125 µs frame  
period.  
c. For each group selected (via SELp) maintain a minimum of 600 ns between microprocessor accesses.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 38 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 12. Microprocessor Read Cycle Timing - Motorola  
tH(1)  
RD/WR  
(Input)  
A(10-0)  
(Input)  
Address  
tD(1)  
tD(5)  
D(7-0)  
(Output)  
Data  
tSU(1)  
tF(1)  
tPW(1)  
CS  
(Internal)  
SELp  
(Input)  
tPW(3)  
tF(2)  
tD(3)  
tD(4)  
tD(2)  
DTACKp  
(Output)  
Note: CS is an internal signal which is the logical OR of the SELp and LDS lead input signals.  
Its timing parameters refer to whichever of these signals controls the associated transition.  
p=1-4 in both the table and figure.  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Address setup time and RD/WRsetup time before  
CS↓  
tSU(1)  
10  
ns  
Address hold time and RD/WRdelay time after CS↑  
Data output float time after CS↑  
CS pulse width  
tH(1)  
tF(1)  
3.0  
2.0  
40  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
11  
tPW(1)  
tD(2)  
tF(2)  
DTACKp driven delay after SELp↓  
DTACKp float time after SELp↑  
2.0  
2.0  
6.0  
10  
10  
26  
DTACKpstable delay after address becomes stable  
(Note 4)  
tD(3)  
Register read  
DTACKp pulse width SPOT instruction read (Note 2)  
Data RAM read (Note 3)  
tPW(3)  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
6 x SPcyc  
9 x SPcyc  
7 x SPcyc  
33 x SPcyc ns  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 39 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Data output delay after Register read only  
tD(1)  
8.0  
28  
ns  
CS↓  
Data output delay after SPOT instruction read and data  
DTACKpRAM read only  
tD(4)  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
Data output tristate to drive delay after CS↓  
tD(5)  
2.0  
Notes:  
1. All output times are measured with a maximum 75 pF load capacitance.  
2. One SPcyc equals two EXTCK clock cycles.  
(The EXTCK clock frequency is 58.32 MHz. One SPcyc is about 34.29 ns.)  
3. Excessive external microprocessor data RAM access could interfere with the E1Mx16 internal data processing, result-  
ing in data corruption. To prevent such a situation, when excessive external microprocessor data RAM access is  
detected, E1Mx16 tries to slow down the external microprocessor access rate by lengthening the RDYp pulse width to  
as high as 97 x SPcyc. To avoid such delays the following are TranSwitch recommendations for access frequency for  
each of the four E1Mx16 SPOT data RAM (addresses are shaded in the memory map at the end of the data sheet).  
a. For each group selected (via SELp) use 16 wait states for a read or write access if the DTACKp signal is not  
being used. Forcing a longer wait state for every access may create unwanted delays in the internal process for  
the E1Mx16. Using the 16 wait states will provide reliability without causing excessive process delays (at the 25  
MHz microprocessor frequency). For other frequencies, use an equivalent number of wait states that equals  
approximately 640 ns.  
b. For each group selected (via SELp) maintain no more than 16 microprocessor accesses per 125 µs frame  
period.  
c. For each group selected (via SELp) maintain a minimum of 600 ns between microprocessor accesses.  
4. During a SPOT instruction read or data RAM read cycle, DTACKp stays high after tD(3). During a register read cycle,  
DTACKp settles to low after tD(3 . DTACKp may go directly from a low to a high impedance state.  
)
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 40 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 13. Microprocessor Write Cycle Timing - Motorola  
tH(1)  
RD/WR  
(Input)  
A(10-0)  
(Input)  
Address  
tSU(2)  
Data  
D(7-0)  
(Input)  
tSU(3)  
tH(2)  
tSU(1)  
tPW(1)  
CS  
(Internal)  
SELp  
(Input)  
tPW(3)  
tF  
tD(3)  
tD(2)  
DTACKp  
(Output)  
Note: CS is an internal signal which is the logical OR of the SELp and LDS lead input signals.  
Its timing parameters refer to whichever of those signals controls the associated transition.  
p=1-4 in both the table and figure.  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
Address setup time and RD/WRsetup time before  
CS↓  
tSU(1)  
10  
ns  
Address hold time and RD/WRdelay time after CS↑  
Data input setup time before CS↑  
Data input hold time after CS↑  
CS pulse width  
tH(1)  
tSU(2)  
tH(2)  
tPW(1)  
tD(2)  
tF  
3.0  
12  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
6.0  
40  
DTACKp driven delay after SELp↓  
DTACKp float time after SELp↑  
2.0  
2.0  
6.0  
10  
10  
26  
DTACKpstable delay after address becomes stable  
tD(3)  
(Note 4)  
Register write  
DTACKp pulse width SPOT instruction write (Note 2)  
Data RAM write (Note 3)  
tPW(3)  
0.0  
ns  
ns  
5 x SPcyc  
9 x SPcyc  
7 x SPcyc  
29 x SPcyc ns  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 41 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Parameter  
Data valid setup time SPOT instruction write and data  
Symbol  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Unit  
tSU(3) -1 x SPcyc  
ns  
to CS↓  
RAM write only  
Notes:  
1. All output times are measured with a maximum 75 pF load capacitance.  
2. One SPcyc equals two EXTCK clock cycles.  
(The EXTCK clock frequency is 58.32 MHz. One SPcyc is about 34.29 ns.)  
3. Excessive external microprocessor data RAM access could interfere with the E1Mx16 internal data processing, result-  
ing in data corruption. To prevent such a situation, when excessive external microprocessor data RAM access is  
detected, E1Mx16 tries to slow down the external microprocessor access rate by lengthening the RDYp pulse width to  
as high as 97 x SPcyc. To avoid such delays the following are TranSwitch recommendations for access frequency for  
each of the four E1Mx16 SPOT data RAM (addresses are shaded in the memory map at the end of the data sheet).  
a. For each group selected (via SELp) use 16 wait states for a read or write access if the DTACKp signal is not  
being used. Forcing a longer wait state for every access may create unwanted delays in the internal process for  
the E1Mx16. Using the 16 wait states will provide reliability without causing excessive process delays (at the 25  
MHz microprocessor frequency). For other frequencies, use an equivalent number of wait states that equals  
approximately 640 ns.  
b. For each group selected (via SELp) maintain no more than 16 microprocessor accesses per 125 µs frame  
period.  
c. For each group selected (via SELp) maintain a minimum of 600 ns between microprocessor accesses.  
4. During a SPOT instruction write or data RAM write cycle, DTACKp stays high after tD(3). During a register write cycle,  
DTACKp settles to low after tD(3 DTACKp may go directly from a low to a high impedance state.  
).  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 42 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 14. Boundary Scan Timing  
t
PWL  
t
PWH  
TCK  
(INPUT)  
t
H(1)  
t
SU(1)  
TMS  
(INPUT)  
t
H(2)  
t
SU(2)  
TDI  
(INPUT)  
t
t
PW(1)  
D
TDO  
(OUTPUT)  
t
PW(1)  
TRS  
(INPUT)  
Parameter  
Symbol  
Min  
Max  
Unit  
TCK clock high time  
tPWH  
tPWL  
tSU(1)  
tH(1)  
50  
50  
3.0  
2.0  
3.0  
2.0  
-
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
TCK clock low time  
TMS setup time before TCK↑  
TMS hold time after TCK↑  
TDI setup time before TCK↑  
TDI hold time after TCK↑  
TDO delay from TCK(Note 1)  
TRS Pulse Width  
-
-
tSU(2)  
tH(2)  
-
-
tD  
22  
-
tPW(1)  
20  
Note 1:The output time (TDO) is measured with a maximum of 75 pF load capacitance.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 43 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
OPERATION  
The following sections detail the internal operation of the E1Mx16.  
BUS INTERFACE MODES  
The E1Mx16 supports the following bus modes of operation:  
- Drop Mode  
- Single Unidirectional Ring Mode  
- Multiplexer Mode  
- Dual Unidirectional Ring Mode  
Drop Mode  
In the drop mode of operation, a TU/VT is terminated from either the A or B Drop bus to the receive output of  
one of the four ports, without a return path in the transmit direction.  
Single Unidirectional Ring Mode  
In the single unidirectional ring mode of operation, a TU/VT is dropped from the A (or B) Drop bus, with the  
return path the A (or B) Add bus. Timing for the TU/VT to be added to the A (or B) Add bus is derived from  
either the A (or B) Drop bus, or from the A (or B) Add bus.  
Multiplexer Mode  
In the multiplexer mode of operation, a TU/VT is dropped from the A (or B) Drop bus, with the return path the B  
(or A) Add bus. Timing for the TU/VT to be added to the A (or B) Add bus is derived from either the A (or B)  
Drop bus, or from the A (or B) Add bus.  
Dual Unidirectional Ring Mode  
In the dual unidirectional ring mode of operation, a TU/VT is dropped from the A (or B) Drop bus, with the  
return path both the A and B Add buses. Timing for the TU/VT to be added to the A (or B) Add bus is derived  
from either the A (or B) Drop bus, or from the A (or B) Add bus.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 44 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
BUS MODE SELECTION  
TU/VT bus mode selection is performed by the control bits defined in the table shown below. The n represents  
the port number (1-4) and p represents the group number (1-4). Note: Both the A and B Add buses power up in  
the high impedance state. A 0 must be written to control bits AAHZEp and BAHZEp for normal add bus opera-  
tion.  
Mode Type  
TnSEL1p TnSEL0p RnSELp DROP from Bus ADD to Bus  
Dropping only, from A  
Dropping only, from B  
Adding only, to A  
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
A
Drop-only (1)  
B
Drop-only (1)  
Add-only (2)  
A
Adding only, to B  
Add-only (2)  
B
Single unidirectional ring  
Single unidirectional ring  
Multiplexer, A in, B out  
Multiplexer, B in, A out  
Dual unidirectional ring  
Dual unidirectional ring  
Notes:  
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
B
A
A and B  
B and A  
1. When the drop-only mode is selected, the ability to add a TU/VT is disabled, and the add bus is tristated.  
2. The add-only feature is enabled by writing a 1 to control bit FRDISnp. The FEBE value and RDI states are  
transmitted as zero. However, the microprocessor can send an RDI, if required.  
Bus Mode Selection for Port n in Group p  
SDH/SONET ADD/DROP MULTIPLEXING FORMAT SELECTIONS  
The control bit settings for format selection are given in the table shown below, where p represents the group  
number (1-4). When the STS-1 format is selected, the buses are configured to operate at a bus rate of 6.48  
Mbyte/s, instead of 19.44 Mbyte/s for VC-4/AU-3/STS-3 formats.  
Format  
MOD1p  
MOD0p  
STS-1 Format  
STS-3 Format  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
STM-1 AU-3 Format  
STM-1 TUG-3/VC-4 Format  
Format Selection for Group p  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 45 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
DROP TU/VT SELECTION  
The TU-12 (VT2) number selection register labels (RTUNnp), which consist of seven bits, are given in the fol-  
lowing table. Selections are the same for each memory group which is selected via the SELp lead (p=1-4). An  
out of range value forces a high impedance state at the E1 receive interface. In addition, the FEBE and RDI  
states will be transmitted as zeros.  
Locations 04CH (port 1), 07CH (port 2), 0ACH (port 3), 0DCH (port 4)  
Bit  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AU-3/TUG-3 or  
STS-1 ID  
TU/VT Group Number  
TU/VT Number  
Meaning  
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
No TU/VT Selected  
STS-1  
AU-3/TUG-3 A, STS-1 #1  
AU-3/TUG-3 B, STS-1 #2  
AU-3/TUG-3 C, STS-1 #3  
TU/VT Group Number 1  
TU/VT Group Number 2  
TU/VT Group Number 3  
TU/VT Group Number 4  
TU/VT Group Number 5  
TU/VT Group Number 6  
TU/VT Group Number 7  
No TU/VT Selected  
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
TU/VT Number 1  
TU/VT Number 2  
TU/VT Number 3  
Drop TU/VT Selection for Port n in any Group p  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 46 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
ADD TU/VT SELECTION  
The TU-12 (VT2) number selection register labels (TTUNnp), which consist of seven bits, are given in the fol-  
lowing table. Selections are the same for each memory group which is selected via the SELp lead (p=1-4). An  
out of range value forces a high impedance state on the add bus.  
Locations 04DH (port 1), 07DH (port 2), 0ADH (port 3), 0DDH (port 4)  
Bit  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
AU-3/TUG-3 or  
STS-1 ID  
TU/VT Group Number  
TU/VT Number  
Meaning  
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
No TU/VT Selected  
STS-1  
AU-3/TUG-3 A, STS-1 #1  
AU-3/TUG-3 B, STS-1 #2  
AU-3/TUG-3 C, STS-1 #3  
TU/VT Group Number 1  
TU/VT Group Number 2  
TU/VT Group Number 3  
TU/VT Group Number 4  
TU/VT Group Number 5  
TU/VT Group Number 6  
TU/VT Group Number 7  
No TU/VT Selected  
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
TU/VT Number 1  
TU/VT Number 2  
TU/VT Number 3  
Add TU/VT Selection for Port n in any Group p  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 47 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
BUS TIMING  
Timing for adding a TU/VT to the add bus is derived from the like-named drop bus, or from the like-named add  
bus. Bus timing may be selected by using a lead, or through software. Upon power-up or a device reset, the  
SBTENp (Software Bus Timing Enable) control bit is reset to 0 and the ABUST lead controls bus timing selec-  
tion. To enable the software to control timing, the SBTENp control bit must be first written with a 1, which will  
override the state placed on the ABUST lead. When SBTENp is 1, bus timing (add or drop bus timing) is con-  
trolled by the DRPBTp control bit. The various states associated with the bus timing selection are shown in the  
table below.  
ABUST lead  
SBTENp  
DRPBTp  
Action  
Low  
0
0
1
1
X
X
0
Add bus timing selected by ABUST lead.  
Drop bus timing selected by ABUST lead.  
Add bus timing selected by DRPBTp bit.  
Drop bus timing selected by DRPBTp bit.  
High  
X
X
1
Note: X = Dont Care  
Bus Timing Selection for Group p  
UNEQUIPPED OPERATION  
The E1Mx16 is capable of sending an unequipped channel or unequipped supervisory channel in all add  
modes of operation. Generally a channel which has either the UCHnEp bit or both the UCHnEp and USCHnEp  
bits set in the port provisioning registers will add an unequipped channel or unequipped supervisory channel  
for the TU/VT selected. An unequipped channel has a TU/VT pointer consisting of a valid NDF, size bits equal  
to 01, and a fixed pointer value of 105. The remaining VT overhead bytes and the payload are sent as zeros.  
The unequipped supervisory channel has an identical pointer to the unequipped channel, but sends a valid J2  
byte, and valid BIP-2 bits and RDI-bit in V5, and valid RDI-bits in Z7. The E1Mx16 also sends a valid Z6 byte.  
The V5, RDI, Z7 RDI, and Z6 bytes can be set to zero by other control bits if they are not required. There are  
some differences in operation based on the UEAMEp bit in register 014H. The following table describes these  
differences.  
Unequipped Channel Generation for Group p  
UCHnEp/USCHnEp UEAMEp2  
Add/Drop Mode  
Drop From  
A add  
B add  
Mux  
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
High-Z  
Normal  
Normal  
High-Z  
Normal  
Normal  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Normal  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Normal  
Normal  
Normal  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Single  
Unidirectional Ring  
0
X1  
Bidirectional Ring  
Drop Only  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 48 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
UCHnEp/USCHnEp UEAMEp2  
Add/Drop Mode  
Drop From  
A add  
B add  
Mux  
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
Unequipped2  
Normal  
Normal  
Unequipped2  
High-Z  
Single  
Unidirectional Ring  
Unequipped  
High-Z  
Unequipped  
0
Bidirectional Ring  
Drop Only  
Mux  
Unequipped Unequipped  
Unequipped Unequipped  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
1
High-Z  
Unequipped2  
High-Z  
Unequipped2  
Unequipped  
High-Z  
Single  
Unidirectional Ring  
High-Z  
Unequipped  
1
Bidirectional Ring  
Drop Only  
Unequipped Unequipped  
Unequipped Unequipped  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
High-Z  
Notes:  
1. X = Dont Care (0 or 1).  
2. Only Multiplexed Mode is effected by the UEAMEp control bit. All other modes operate the same way regard-  
less of the state of the UEAMEp control bit.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 49 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
DROP BUS MULTIFRAME ALIGNMENT  
V1 byte alignment in the receive direction (from the drop bus) is established by using the H4 byte or the V1 ref-  
erence pulse in the ADC1J1V1 and BDC1J1V1 signals. Depending on the format, one or three V1 pulses will  
be present in these signals. When the H4 byte is used to establish V1 byte alignment, the V1 pulse does not  
have to be present in the ADC1J1V1 or BDC1J1V1 signal. Writing a 1 to control bit DV1SELp selects the V1  
pulse in the ADC1J1V1 and BDC1J1V1 signal to be used to establish the V1 byte location reference, while a 0  
selects the H4 byte as the multiframe detector for establishing the V1 reference. The H4 multiframe detection  
circuits are disabled when the V1 pulse is used in place of the H4 byte.  
For STM-1 VC-4 operation, a single V1 pulse must occur three drop bus clock cycles every four frames follow-  
ing the J1 pulse. For STM-1 AU3/STS-3 operation, three V1 pulses must be present every four frames. Each  
V1 pulse must be present three clock cycles after the corresponding J1 pulse, when the SPE signal is high. For  
example, in a VC-4 signal, the J1 pulse identifies the J1 byte location (defined as the starting location for the  
VC-4) in the POH bytes. In the next column (first clock cycle) all the rows are assigned as fixed stuff. Similarly,  
in the next column (second clock cycle) all the rows are assigned as fixed stuff. The next column (third clock  
cycle) defines the start of TUG-3 A. This column is where the V1 pulse occurs every four frames. However, the  
actual V1 byte occurs six clock cycles after the V1 pulse.  
For STS-1 operation, one V1 pulse must be present. The V1 pulse must occur on the next clock cycle after J1,  
and when the SPE signal is high. The J1 pulse identifies the J1 byte location (defined as the starting location  
for the STS-1) in the POH bytes. The next column (first clock cycle) defines the VTs starting location. Thus, the  
V1 pulse identifies the starting location of the first V1 byte in the signal. The rest of the V1 bytes for the 21  
VT2s are also aligned with respect to the V1 pulse. The timing relationships between J1, V1, and other signals  
are shown in the Timing Characteristics section.  
The H4 byte is used to identify the location of the V1 byte as shown in Figure 15 below:  
2048 kbit/s  
TU/VT  
H4 (XXXX XX00)  
Of Previous SPE  
V1  
35  
Bytes  
H4 (XXXX XX01)  
V2  
35  
Bytes  
H4 (XXXX XX10)  
V3  
35  
Bytes  
H4 (XXXX XX11)  
V4  
35  
Bytes  
Figure 15. H4 Byte Floating VT Mode Bit Allocation  
The H4 byte is monitored for multiframe alignment when enabled. Loss of multiframe alignment is declared  
(AsDH4Ep, BsDH4Ep (s=1-3, p=1-4)) if two or more H4 byte values differ from those of a 2-bit counter for two  
consecutive multiframes. Recovery occurs when four consecutive sequential H4 byte values are detected  
once.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 50 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
ADD BUS MULTIFRAME ALIGNMENT  
When drop bus timing is selected, add bus V1 alignment is based on the drop bus V1 pulse (A/BDC1J1V1) if  
DV1SELp is 1, or on the V1 reference signal that is generated by the H4 multiframe detectors in the drop bus  
side if DV1SELp is 0.  
When add bus timing is selected and a 0 is written to control bit DV1REFp, V1 byte alignment for the add bus is  
established by using the V1 pulses that must be present in the A/BAC1J1V1 signal. When add bus timing is  
selected and a 1 is written to control bit DV1REFp, V1 byte alignment for the add bus is determined by the drop  
bus V1 reference from either the A/BDC1J1V1 signal (if DV1SELp is 1), or from the internal V1 reference signal  
generated by the H4 multiframe detector in the drop bus direction (if DV1SELp is 0). The V1 pulse that is  
present in the A/BAC1J1V1 signal is ignored. Extreme care must be taken when using this V1 selection mode  
to prevent add bus V1 byte alignment slips.  
The control bit selection for both V1 add and drop bus byte alignment is described in the table below.  
Bus Timing Mode DV1REFp DV1SELp  
Action  
Drop bus timing  
selected  
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
Drop bus A/B H4 multiframe detector determines dropped  
TU/VT V1 byte starting location, and added TU/VT V1 byte  
starting location. V1 pulse in drop bus A/BDC1J1V1 signal  
ignored.  
Drop bus timing  
selected  
Drop bus V1 pulse in the A/BDC1J1V1 signal determines  
dropped TU/VT V1 byte starting location, and added TU/VT  
V1 byte starting location. A/B drop bus H4 multiframe detec-  
tor disabled.  
Add bus timing  
selected  
Drop bus A/B H4 multiframe detector determines dropped  
TU/VT V1 byte starting location. V1 pulse in drop bus  
A/BDC1J1V1 signal ignored. Add bus V1 alignment deter-  
mined by the V1 pulse in the add bus A/BAC1J1V1 signal.  
Add bus timing  
selected  
Drop bus V1 pulse in the A/BDC1J1V1 signal determines  
dropped TU/VT starting location. Drop bus H4 multiframe  
detector disabled. Add bus V1 alignment determined by the  
V1 pulse in the add bus A/BAC1J1V1 signal.  
Add bus timing  
selected  
Drop bus A/B H4 multiframe detector determines dropped  
TU/VT V1 byte starting location. V1 pulses in drop bus  
A/BDC1J1V1 and add bus A/BAC1J1V1 signals are  
ignored. Add bus V1 alignment determined by the internal  
V1 pulse generated by the drop bus A/B H4 byte detector.  
Add bus timing  
selected  
1
1
Drop bus V1 pulse in the A/BDC1J1V1 signal determines  
dropped TU/VT V1 byte starting location, A/B drop bus H4  
multiframe detector disabled. V1 pulse in add bus  
A/BAC1J1V1 signal is ignored. Add bus V1 alignment deter-  
mined by the V1 pulse in the drop bus A/BDC1J1V1 signal.  
Note: X = Dont Care. Bus timing mode is selected via lead ABUST and control bits SBTENp, DRPBTp, as described  
earlier.  
Add and Drop Bus V1 Reference Selection for Group p  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 51 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
PERFORMANCE COUNTERS  
All performance counters are saturating, with the counters stopping at their maximum count. A counter is reset  
to zero by a hardware or software device reset, and when it is read by the microprocessor. The performance  
counters for port n of group p are also reset when a 1 is written to control bit RnSETCp. This bit is self-clearing,  
and does not require the microprocessor to write a 0 into its location. Counts that occur during the read cycle  
are held and updated afterwards. For a 16-bit counter, the low order byte must be read first, followed by read-  
ing the high order byte before the corresponding low order byte for another port is read.  
ALARM STRUCTURE  
All alarm indications are reported as unlatched and latched status bits. The latched bit of an alarm can be set  
on the positive transitions, negative transitions, both positive and negative transitions, or positive levels of the  
alarm. Reading a latched alarm bit clears the bit to 0.  
When control bit LATENp (address 011H, bit 4 of each memory group) is written with a 1, the latching of alarm  
transitions is enabled. Control bits IPOSp and INEGp (address 012H, bits 5 and 4 of each memory group)  
should be programmed to select the transition(s) on which latched bits are set. When LATENp is written with a  
0, the latched bits are set on positive levels of the alarms. The IPOSp and INEGp bits are disabled when  
LATENp is set to 0.  
Alarm Hierarchy Mask  
Since multiple alarms at various levels can be detected simultaneously, a hierarchical masking scheme is  
employed in the E1Mx16. The E1Mx16 hierarchical mask effectively eliminates the confusion caused by the  
simultaneous reporting of multiple alarms and speeds up the identification of the alarm origins.  
The following table shows the hierarchical masking of unlatched low level alarms by high order alarms  
(depending on the Drop Bus selected and the Port selected). Masked cells indicate the lower level alarm  
masked by the high order alarms. For example: low level alarms J2LOL and J2TIM are masked when any of  
the following high order alarms/conditions are active: DLOC, OOR, UAISI, DH4E, AIS, LOP or SLER.  
Low Level Alarms masked by High Order Alarms  
High Order  
UAISI  
DH4E  
LOP  
AIS  
SLER  
RFI  
J2LOL  
J2TIM  
RDIS  
RDIP  
RDIC  
TCUQ  
TCAIS  
TCLM  
TCLL  
TCTM  
TCODI  
TCRDI  
Alarms or  
Conditions  
UNEQ  
NDF  
SIZE  
DLOC  
OOR1  
UAISI2, DH4E3  
AIS, LOP  
Signal Label  
=001 or =000  
SLER5  
TCLM4  
Notes:  
1. OOR: Receive TU/VT Out Of Range is the condition when the receive TU/VT select bits (registers 0x4C, 7C, AC, DC)  
are set to an invalid value in which no TU/VT is selected (e.g. 0x00). There is no alarm bit to indicate this condition.  
2. When control bit HEAISEp is 1  
3. When control bit DV1SELp is 0  
4. When control bit TCnENp is 1  
5. When control bit 1BnRDIp = 0  
When control bit 1BnRDIp = 1, then J2 Message Tracking is still enabled and SLER alarm will not mask J2LOL and  
J2TIM.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 52 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
INTERRUPT STRUCTURE  
The interrupt indication register (address 020H of each memory group) contains the global software interrupt  
bit INTp and other interrupt indication bits. Each interrupt indication bit has an associated set of latched alarm  
bits. A mask bit is provided to enable the set of latched alarms to trigger their interrupt indication bit. For port  
alarms, the latched alarms of each port are further divided into several groups. A second level of mask bit is  
provided for each of these groups to mask out the interrupt indication bit of the port. For each interrupt indica-  
tion bit, if its interrupt mask bits are 1, and one or more of its associated latched alarm bits are set, the interrupt  
indication bit will become 1; which in turn causes the software interrupt indication bit INTp to become 1. The  
E1Mx16 also generates a hardware interrupt at the tristate 8mA interrupt leads INTp/IRQp (p = 1 to 4), pro-  
vided the hardware interrupt enable bit (HDWIEp) is 1. INT1/IRQ1 is an interrupt lead for the first group of four  
mappers (channels 1-4) and INT2/IRQ2, INT3/IRQ3 and INT4/IRQ4 are interrupt leads for the other three  
groups of four mappers.  
Addresses 016H and 021H (of each memory group) are the first set of interrupt mask registers. The additional  
mask registers for the port alarms are contained in addresses 017H, 018H and 019H (of each memory group).  
Upon power-up, when the RESETp bit (bit 7 in address 015H of each memory group) is written with a 1, or an  
active low is placed on the RESET lead, all the interrupt mask bits are cleared to 0. They must be initialized to  
1 in order to enable the interrupt indication bits. Control bits IPOSp, INEGp and LATENp should also be pro-  
grammed to determine how the latched alarms are to be set.  
Consider alarm AnAISp. Assume that HDWIEp is 1, the interrupt masks for AnAISp are 1, the control bits  
IPOSp and LATENp are 1, and control bit INEGp is 0. Since AnAISp is a port alarm, interrupt mask bit  
PnMSKp and the second level mask bit RPTnAp should be set to 1. A positive transition on AnAISp causes the  
latched bit of AnAISp to be set, which in turn sets the interrupt indication bit PORTnp. Then, both software and  
hardware interrupts occur.  
When an interrupt occurs, the external microprocessor can determine the alarm that caused the interrupt by  
reading the latched alarm registers that correspond to the interrupt indication bit and interrupt mask bit. The  
read cycles allow the microprocessor to determine what alarm has been set. When the register containing the  
latched alarm (e.g., AnAISp) has been read, the latched alarm bit is cleared, releasing the software interrupt  
(INTp and PORTnp returning to 0) and hardware interrupt. If there is more than one alarm in more than one  
alarm register, each of the corresponding latched alarm registers must be read before the interrupt is released.  
In addition, the hardware and software interrupt may be released by writing a 0 to the mask bits that corre-  
spond to the interrupt indication register. For AnAISp, the interrupt can be masked by writing 0 to PnMSKp or to  
the RPTnAp bits.  
Note:Address map locations represent each of the mapper groups p (p=1-4) in the E1Mx16.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 53 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Interrupt Registers for Group p  
Address*  
020H  
Interrupt Indication Register (Address 020H)  
INTp  
EXTCKp  
ASIDEp  
BSIDEp  
PORT4p  
PORT3p  
PORT2p  
PORT1p  
Interrupt Mask Register (Address 016H, 021H)  
016H  
021H  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
SPTMSKp  
P1MSKp  
ECKMSKp  
ASMSKp  
BSMSKp  
P4MSKp  
P3MSKp  
P2MSKp  
Additional Interrupt Mask Registers (Addresses 017H, 018H, 019H)  
RPT4Bp RPT3Ap RPT3Bp RPT2Ap RPT2Bp RPT1Ap  
017H  
018H  
019H  
RPT4Ap  
RPT1Bp  
TFIFO4Ap TFIFO4Bp TFIFO3Ap TFIFO3Bp TFIFO2Ap TFIFO2Bp TFIFO1Ap TFIFO1Bp  
TPORT4p TPORT3p  
TPORT2p TPORT1p  
RFIFO4p  
RFIFO3p  
RFIFO2p  
RFIFO1p  
Interrupt Indication ASIDE Registers (Addresses 022H, 024H)  
A Side Drop/Add Alarms (ASIDE)  
022H  
024H  
ADLOCp  
LEXTCp  
AALOCp  
0
ADPARp  
0
0
0
0
0
A3UAISIp  
A3DH4Ep  
A2UAISIp  
A2DH4Ep  
A1UAISIp  
A1DH4Ep  
Interrupt Indication BSIDE Registers (Addresses 026H, 028H)  
B Side Drop/Add Alarms (BSIDE)  
026H  
028H  
BDLOCp  
BALOCp  
BDPARp  
0
0
0
0
B3UAISIp  
B3DH4Ep  
B2UAISIp  
B2DH4Ep  
B1UAISIp  
B1DH4Ep  
SPTLOCp WDTEXPp  
PERRp  
Interrupt Indication PORTnp Registers (Addresses 030H, 04EH, 05AH, 03AH, 05EH, 05CH, 044H for Port 1)  
Port n Alarms (PORTnp)  
030H 060H  
090H 0C0H  
AnAISp  
AnLOPp  
AnSIZEp  
0
AnNDFp  
0
AnRDISp  
AnRFIp  
AnUNEQp AnSLERp  
04EH 07EH  
0AEH 0DEH  
AnRDIPp  
AnRDICp  
AnJ2LOLp AnJ2TIMp  
0
0
0
05AH 08AH  
0BAH 0EAH  
AnTCUQp AnTCAISp AnTCLMp AnTCLLp AnTCTMp AnTCODIp AnTCRDIp  
03AH 06AH  
09AH 0CAH  
BnAISp  
BnLOPp  
BnSIZEp  
0
BnNDFp  
0
BnRDISp  
BnRFIp  
BnUNEQp BnSLERp  
05EH 08EH  
0BEH 0EEH  
BnRDIPp  
BnRDICp  
BnJ2LOLp BnJ2TIMp  
0
0
0
05CH 08CH  
0BCH 0ECH  
BnTCUQp BnTCAISp BnTCLMp BnTCLLp BnTCTMp BnTCODIp BnTCRDIp  
RnFFEp TAnFEp TBnFEp TnLOSp TnLOCp  
044H 074H  
0A4H 0D4H  
0
1
TnDAISp  
*Note: Address map locations represent each of the mapper groups p (p=1-4) in the E1Mx16.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 54 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Alarms, Interrupt Masks and Interrupt Indications  
A Side and B Side Alarms and Interrupts for Group p  
Latched Alarm  
Address2  
Interrupt Mask  
or (016H or 021H)  
Additional Interrupt Interrupt Indication  
Alarm Name  
Mask (if any)  
Bit (020H)  
022H  
024H  
026H  
028H  
ADLOCp  
AALOCp  
ADPARp  
0
ASMSKp  
ASIDEp  
0
A3UAISIp  
A2UAISIp  
A1UAISIp  
LEXTCp  
0
ECKMSKp  
EXTCKp  
0
0
0
A3DH4Ep  
A2DH4Ep  
A1DH4Ep  
BDLOCp  
BALOCp  
BDPARp  
0
ASMSKp  
BSMSKp  
ASIDEp  
BSIDEp  
-
0
B3UAISIp  
B2UAISIp  
B1UAISIp  
SPTLOCp  
WDTEXPp  
0
SPTMSKp  
BSMSKp  
-
-
(Note 1)  
BSIDEp  
PERRp  
0
B3DH4Ep  
B2DH4Ep  
B1DH4Ep  
Notes:  
1. The SPOT alarm does not have an interrupt indication bit but it can still cause both software interrupt  
(INTp bit) and hardware interrupt (INTp/IRQp lead).  
2. Address map locations represent each of the mapper groups p (p=1-4) in the E1Mx16.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 55 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
A Side and B Side Port n Alarms and Interrupts for Group p  
Additional  
Interrupt  
Additional  
Interrupt Interrupt  
Interrupt  
Indication  
Bit  
Latched  
Alarm  
Interrupt Interrupt  
Mask  
(021H)  
Latched  
Alarm  
Alarm  
Name  
Indication  
Bit  
Alarm  
Name  
Mask  
(if any)  
(017H)  
Mask  
(021H)  
Mask  
(if any)  
(017H)  
Address2  
Address2  
(020H)  
(020H)  
030 port 1 AnAISp  
PnMSKp  
RPTnAp  
PORTnp 03A port 1 BnAISp  
PnMSKp  
RPTnBp  
PORTnp  
060 port 2  
090 port 3  
0C0 port 4  
06A port 2  
09A port 3  
0CA port 4  
AnLOPp  
BnLOPp  
AnSIZEp  
BnSIZEp  
AnNDFp  
AnRDISp  
AnRFIp  
BnNDFp  
BnRDISp  
BnRFIp  
RFIEp  
RFIEp  
(Note 1)  
(Note 1)  
AnUNEQp  
AnSLERp  
RPTnAp  
BnUNEQp  
BnSLERp  
RPTnBp  
04E port 1 AnRDIPp  
05E port 1 BnRDIPp  
07E port 2  
0AE port 3  
0DE port 4  
08E port 2  
0BE port 3  
0EE port 4  
AnRDICp  
BnRDICp  
0
0
0
0
AnJ2LOLp  
BnJ2LOLp  
AnJ2TIMp  
BnJ2TIMp  
0
0
0
0
05A port 1 AnTCUQp  
05C port 1 BnTCUQp  
08A port 2  
0BA port 3  
AnTCLMp  
0EA port 4  
08C port 2  
0BC port 3  
BnTCLMp  
0EC port 4  
AnTCAISp  
BnTCAISp  
AnTCLLp  
AnTCTMp  
AnTCODIp  
AnTCRDIp  
0
BnTCLLp  
BnTCTMp  
BnTCODIp  
BnTCRDIp  
0
Notes:  
1. RFIEp (address 012H, bit 3) is a common control bit for all four ports. A 1 enables the RFI indication to cause  
an interrupt. RPTnAp or RPTnBp is not required to be set to 1 to enable the interrupt for the RFI indication.  
A 0 disables an RFI indication from causing an interrupt.  
2. Address map locations represent each of the mapper groups p (p=1-4) in the E1Mx16.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 56 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Common Port n Alarms and Interrupts for Group p  
Additional  
Interrupt  
Indication Bit  
(020H*)  
Latched Alarm  
Address*  
Interrupt Mask  
(021H*)  
Interrupt Mask  
(if any)  
Alarm Name  
(018H* or 019H*)  
044 port 1  
074 port 2  
0A4 port 3  
0D4 port 4  
RnFFEp  
0
PnMSKp  
RFIFOnp  
PORTnp  
1
TAnFEp  
TBnFEp  
TnLOSp  
TnLOCp  
TnDAISp  
TFIFOnAp  
TFIFOnBp  
TPORTnp  
*Note: Address map locations represent each of the mapper groups p (p=1-4) in the E1Mx16.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 57 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Interrupt and Alarm Control Bit Summary for Group p  
IPOSp  
012H*: 5  
INEGp  
012H*: 4  
HDWIEp  
014H*: 0  
LATENp  
011H*: 4  
Interrupt  
Mask Bit  
Action on an Alarm  
0
0
0
1
X
No alarm event indication, or interrupt register  
indication.  
X
X
X
0
0
Alarm event register sets on positive levels of  
an alarm; no software or hardware interrupt  
indications.  
X
X
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
X
X
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
X
0
1
X
0
1
X
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
Alarm event register sets, and software inter-  
rupt indication occurs, on positive levels of the  
alarm; no hardware interrupt.  
Alarm event register sets, and software and  
hardware interrupt indications occur, on posi-  
tive levels of the alarm.  
Alarm event register sets on positive transi-  
tions of the alarm; no software or hardware  
interrupt indications.  
Alarm event register sets, and software inter-  
rupt indication occurs, on positive transitions  
of the alarm; no hardware interrupt.  
Alarm event register sets, and software and  
hardware interrupt indications occur, on posi-  
tive transitions of the alarm.  
Alarm event register sets on negative transi-  
tions of the alarm; no software or hardware  
interrupt indications.  
Alarm event register sets, and software inter-  
rupt indication occurs, on negative transitions  
of the alarm; no hardware interrupt.  
Alarm event register sets, and software and  
hardware interrupt indications occur, on nega-  
tive transitions of the alarm.  
Alarm event register sets on positive and/or  
negative transitions of the alarm; no software  
or hardware interrupt indications.  
Alarm event register sets, and software inter-  
rupt indication occurs, on positive and/or neg-  
ative transitions of the alarm; no hardware  
interrupt.  
1
1
1
1
1
Alarm event register sets, and software and  
hardware interrupt indications occur, on posi-  
tive and/or negative transitions of alarm.  
*Note: Address map locations represent each of the mapper groups p (p=1-4) in the E1Mx16.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 58 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
SDH/SONET AIS DETECTION  
The E1Mx16 can detect an upstream AIS condition using the TOH H1/H2 (pointer) bytes or the TOH E1 (order  
wire) byte. When control bit SE1AISp (address 014H, bit 3 of each memory group) is 0, the H1/H2 bytes are  
monitored for an upstream AIS condition. When the MOD control bits (address 010H, bits 7 and 6 of each  
memory group) select the VC-4/TUG-3 format, the H11 and H21 bytes only are monitored for AIS. The moni-  
toring of AIS in the two other H1n/H2n bytes is disabled. When the MOD control bits select the STS-3 or AU-3  
format, each set of the three H1/H2 bytes per A Drop and B Drop buses is monitored for an AIS indication.  
Each of the three H1/H2 pointer bytes corresponds to the like-numbered AU-3/STS-1 signal (n=1-3). When the  
MOD control bits select the STS-1 format, the H1/H2 bytes per A Drop and B Drop buses are monitored for an  
AIS indication.  
If all ones are detected in the H1/H2 bytes (whose location is determined by the C1 pulse) for three consecu-  
tive frames, the alarm bits AsUAISIp in addresses 022H and 023H of each memory group (A bus detected H1/  
H2 or E1 byte upstream AIS) or BsUAISIp in addresses 026H and 027H of each memory group (B bus  
detected H1/H2 or E1 byte upstream AIS) will set. Recovery occurs when a normal NDF (bits 1 through 4) in  
H1 is detected for three consecutive frames. A normal NDF is defined as a 0110, but 1110, 0010, 0100 and  
0111 are also recognized as normal. The H1/H2 byte AIS detection circuits (when selected) for both the A and  
B Drop buses are disabled by writing a 0 to control bit HEAISEp (address 013H, bit 7 of each memory group).  
When control bit SE1AISp is 1, the E1n bytes for the port are monitored for an upstream AIS condition. When  
the MOD control bits select the VC-4/TUG-3 format, the E11 byte in both buses is monitored for AIS. The  
detection of the upstream AIS indication in the E12 and E13 bytes is disabled. When the MOD control bits  
select the AU-3/STS-3 format, each of the three E1n bytes in the A and B Drop buses are monitored for AIS.  
Each of the three E1n bytes corresponds to the like-numbered AU-3/STS-1 signal. For STS-1 operation, the  
single E1 byte is checked for the upstream AIS indication.  
Majority logic is used to determine if an E1n byte is carrying an upstream AIS indication. If 5 or more ones (at  
least 5 bits equal to 1 out of the 8 bits) are detected once in a A/B Drop bus E1n byte (whose locations are  
determined by the C1 pulse), the alarm bit AsUAISIp (A bus detected H1/H2 or E1 Byte AIS) or BsUAISIp (B  
bus detected H1/H2 or E1 Byte AIS) is set. Recovery occurs when 4 or more zeros (at least 4 bits equal to 0  
out of the 8 bits) are detected once. The E1n byte AIS detection circuits (when selected) for both the A and B  
Drop buses are disabled by writing a 0 to control bit HEAISEp.  
TU/VT POINTER TRACKING  
The starting location of the V1 byte is determined by either the V1 pulses in the A/BC1J1V1 signals or the H4  
multiframe detection circuits. The TU/VT pointer bit assignment for the V1 and V2 bytes is shown below. The  
alignment is necessary to determine the starting locations of the V5 byte and the other bytes that are carrying  
the 2048 kbit/s format.  
V1 Byte  
V2 Byte  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
I
8
1
I
2
3
I
4
5
I
6
7
I
8
N
N
N
N
SS-bits  
D
D
D
D
D
I = Increment Bit  
D = Decrement Bit  
N = New Data Flag Bit  
(enabled = 1001 or 0001/1101/1011/1000, normal or disabled = 0110 or 1110/0010/0100/0111)  
Negative Justification: Inverted 5 D-bits and accept majority rule  
Positive Justification: Inverted 5 I-bits and accept majority rule  
SS-bits (VT Size) = 10 for 2048 kbit/s  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 59 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Pointer Bytes Bit Assignment  
The pointer value is a binary number with a range of 0 to 139 for the 2048 kbit/s format. The pointer offset indi-  
cates the offset from the V2 byte to the first byte in the TU-12/VT2 mapping. The pointer bytes are not counted  
in the offset calculation. The pointer offset arrangement for this format is shown below.  
2048 kbit/s TU-12/VT2  
V1  
105  
106-138  
139  
V2  
0
1-33  
34  
V3  
35  
36-68  
69  
V4  
70  
71-103  
104  
TU/VT Pointer Offset Locations  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 60 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Thirty-two independent pointer-tracking state machines are used in the E1Mx16, one for each of the A and B  
buses in each of the four groups of the four ports 1, 2, 3, and 4. The pointer tracking algorithm is illustrated in  
Figure 16. The pointer tracking state machine is based on the pointer tracking machine found in the latest ETSI  
requirements, and is also valid for both Bellcore and ANSI. When control bit PTALTEp at address 014H, bit 1 is  
0, the transition from AIS to LOP is disabled (shown dotted), which is required in Bellcore recommendations.  
3 x AIS_ind  
(Offset Undefined)  
inc_ind  
(Incr. Offset)  
3 x any_point  
INC  
3 x new_point  
(Accept New Offset)  
NDF_enable  
3 x AIS_ind  
DEC  
(Accept New Offset)  
(Offset Undefined)  
NDF_enable  
(Accept New Offset)  
3 x new_point  
(Accept New Offset)  
3 x new_point  
(Accept New Offset)  
3 x any_point  
NDF_enable  
(Accept New Offset)  
dec_ind  
(Decr. Offset)  
3 x any_point  
NDF  
NDF_enable  
NORM  
(Accept New Offset)  
3 x new_point  
8 x inv_point  
(Accept New Offset)  
3 x AIS_ind  
(Offset Undefined)  
(Offset Undefined)  
3 x new_point  
3 x new_point  
(Accept New Offset)  
(Accept New Offset)  
3 x AIS_ind  
(Offset Undefined)  
8 x NDF_enable  
LOP  
AIS  
(Offset Undefined)  
8 x inv_point  
(Offset Undefined)  
NDF_enable  
(Accept New Offset)  
3 x AIS_ind  
(Offset Undefined)  
Figure 16. TU/VT Pointer Tracking State Machine  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 61 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
REMOTE DEFECT INDICATIONS  
A 1-Bit/3-Bit RDI Selection bit - 1BnRDIp (bit 4 in registers 048H, 078H, 0A8H, 0D8H) - has been added to  
allow the user to select between the Enhanced 3-Bit RDI (1BnRDIp = 0) or Single Bit RDI (1BnRDIp = 1). The  
following sections describe the differences.  
V5 and K4 (Z7) Byte Coding (for 3-Bit RDI)  
Bits 5, 6 and 7 in the K4 (Z7) byte, in conjunction with bit 8 in the V5 byte, provide a detection scheme which is  
compliant with earlier versions of the RDI standard and also with enhanced TU/VT RDI capability. The  
enhanced version of RDI allows the user to differentiate between server, connectivity, and payload defects. Bit  
8 in V5 is set equal to bit 5 in K4 (Z7). Bit 7 in K4 (Z7) is set to the inverse of bit 6 of K4 (Z7) to distinguish the  
enhanced version of RDI from the old version of RDI. It should be noted that when bits 6 and 7 in K4 (Z7) are  
either 01 or 10, the RDI indication is also influenced by Bit 8 of V5, as shown in the table below. When bits 6  
and 7 are either 00 or 11, then RDI is determined solely by bit 8 in V5. This allows detection of an RDI originat-  
ing from older equipment that generates the RDI in the V5 byte. The following table lists the RDI defect indica-  
tions carried in the V5 and K4 (Z7) bytes.  
Bit 8 V5  
Bit 5 K4 (Z7) Bit 6 K4 (Z7) Bit 7 K4 (Z7)  
Definition  
No defect indications.  
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
No defect indications.  
Remote Payload Defect  
- Path Label Mismatch  
- Loss of Multiframe.  
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
No defect indications.  
Remote defect (old equipment).  
Remote Server Defect  
- VT Loss of Pointer  
- VT AIS detected  
- Upstream AIS detected (E1 or H1/H2 Bytes).  
1
1
1
1
0
1
Remote Connectivity Defect  
- Unequipped Signal Label  
- J2 Mismatch  
- J2 Loss of Lock  
Remote defect (old equipment).  
RDI Bit Assignment for 3-Bit RDI  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 62 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Receive RDI Detection and Recovery (for 3-Bit RDI)  
The RDI alarms are defined in the table below. The number of consecutive events for detection and recovery is  
controlled by control bit V5AL10p in address 014H, bit 2. The value of five is selected when the V5AL10p con-  
trol bit is 0, and the value of ten is selected when the V5AL10p control bit is 1.  
AnRDICp  
BnRDICp  
AnRDIPp  
BnRDIPp  
AnRDISp  
BnRDISp  
Action  
0
0
1
Remote Server Defect Indication, and old equip-  
ment RDI indication (Bit 8 in the V5 byte).  
0
1
1
0
0
0
Remote Payload Defect Indication.  
Remote Connectivity Indication.  
RDI Alarm Definition for 3-Bit RDI  
Transmit RDI Generation (for 3-Bit RDI)  
An RDI is sent for the following unlatched alarm conditions in the V5 and K4 (Z7) overhead bytes of the VT  
added to the A or B Add bus, depending on the states of the RnSELp (active bus selected), TnSEL1p and  
TnSEL0p (bus enabled) control bits. The following examples apply to port 1, but corresponding examples for  
ports 2 through 4 may be constructed by substituting the port number digit for the 1-digit in the bit symbols  
(except DV1SELp). The variable s refers to the STS-1 or AU-3/TUG-3 identifier (s = 1 - 3).  
- When RDI enable (RDIENp) is 1, a Remote Server Defect Indication is sent for:  
- VT Loss of Pointer (A1LOPp, B1LOPp)  
- VT AIS (A1AISp, B1AISp)  
- A/B Drop Bus Upstream AIS in H1/H2 or the E1 byte (AsUAISIp, BsUAISIp), when HEAISEp is 1  
- Microprocessor writes a 1 to T1RDISp  
- When RDI enable (RDIENp) is 1, a Remote Payload Defect Indication is sent for:  
- A/B Drop H4 Error (AsDH4Ep, BsDH4Ep), when DV1SELp is 0  
- Mismatch signal label (A1SLERp, B1SLERp)  
- Microprocessor writes a 1 to T1RDIPp  
- When RDI enable (RDIENp) is 1, a Remote Connectivity Defect Indication is sent for:  
- Unequipped signal label (A1UNEQp, B1UNEQp), when UQAEp is 1  
- J2 Mismatch (A1J2TIMp, B1J2TIMp), when J21AISEp is 1  
- J2 Loss of Lock (A1J2LOLp, B1J2LOLp), when J21AISEp is a 1  
- Microprocessor writes a 1 to T1RDICp  
- When RDI enable (RDIENp) is 0, the microprocessor can control RDI generation:  
- Microprocessor writes a 1 to T1RDISp to generate remote server defect indication.  
- Microprocessor writes a 1 to T1RDIPp to generate remote payload defect indication.  
- Microprocessor writes a 1 to T1RDICp to generate remote connectivity defect indication.  
Note: The microprocessor may send an RDI by writing to the above control bits at any time, including the add-only mode.  
To prevent contention between the internal logic and full microprocessor control, the RDIENp control bit should be  
written with a 0 when microprocessor control is intended. The priority used for sending RDI if more than one of the  
microprocessor controls are set is: Server, Connectivity, and Payload. When RDIEN = 1 and no defects are gener-  
ated then K4 bits 5,6,7 = 001.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 63 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
V5 and K4 (Z7) Byte Coding (for 1-Bit RDI)  
In the Receive (Rx) direction bit 8 in the V5 byte is used to detect Remote Defect Indications. Bits 5, 6, and 7 in  
the Rx K4(Z7) byte are not looked at for detecting RDI and can have any incoming value, 0 or 1.  
For transmitting 1-Bit RDI, bit 8 in V5 byte will be set as shown below and bits 5,6,7 in the K4(Z7) byte will be  
sent as 0. See table below:  
Bit 8 V5  
Bit 5 K4 (Z7) Bit 6 K4 (Z7) Bit 7 K4 (Z7)  
Definition  
No defect indications.  
Remote Defect Indication.  
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
RDI Bit Assignment for 1-Bit RDI  
Receive RDI Detection and Recovery (for 1-Bit RDI)  
The RDI alarm is defined in the table below. The number of consecutive events for detection and recovery is  
controlled by a Common Register - Provisioning Control bit V5AL10p (register 014H, bit 2). When V5AL10p =  
0, the value is 5; when V5AL10p = 1, the value is 10. A Remote Defect Indication is indicated by alarm indica-  
tion bit AnRDISp/BnRDISp. Alarm indication bits AnRDIPp/BnRDIPp and AnRDICp/BnRDICp are disabled and  
will always be equal to zero when 1-Bit RDI mode is selected.  
AnRDICp  
BnRDICp  
AnRDIPp  
BnRDIPp  
AnRDISp  
BnRDISp  
Action  
No defect indications.  
Remote Defect Indication.  
0
0
0
0
0
1
RDI Alarm Definition for 1-Bit RDI  
Transmit RDI Generation (for 1-Bit RDI)  
An RDI is sent for the following unlatched alarm conditions in the V5 overhead byte of the VT added to the A or  
B Add bus, depending on the states of the RnSELp (active bus selected), TnSEL1p and TnSEL0p (bus  
enabled) control bits. The following examples apply to port 1, but corresponding examples for ports 2 through 4  
may be constructed by substituting the port number digit for the 1-digit in the bit symbols (except DV1SELp).  
The variable s refers to the STS-1 or AU-3/TUG-3 identifier (s = 1 - 3).  
- When RDI enable (RDIENp) is 1, a remote defect indication (bit 8 in V5=1; bits 5,6,7 in K4(Z7)=0) is sent for:  
- VT Loss of Pointer (AnLOPp, BnLOPp)  
- VT AIS (AnAISp, BnAISp)  
- A/B Drop Bus Upstream AIS in H1/H2 or the E1 byte (AsUAISIp, BsUAISIp), when HEAISEp is 1.  
- Unequipped Signal Label (AnUNEQp, BnUNEQp), when UQAEp is 1.  
- J2 Loss of Lock (A1J2LOLp, B1J2LOLp), when J21AISEp is a 1.  
- J2 Mismatch (A1J2TIMp, B1J2TIMp), when J21AISEp is 1  
- Microprocessor writes a 1 to T1RDISp to generate a Remote Defect Indication.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 64 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
- When RDI enable (RDIENp) is 0, the microprocessor can control RDI generation:  
- Microprocessor writes a 1 to T1RDISp to generate Remote Defect Indication.  
Note: For 1-Bit RDI mode the following unlatched alarm conditions will not generate a Remote Defect Indica-  
tion:  
- A drop H4 error (AsDH4Ep, BsDH4Ep), when DV1SEL is a 0.  
- Mismatch signal label (AnSLERp, BnSLERp).  
Note: For 1-Bit RDI mode the following microprocessor control bits are disabled and will not generate a  
Remote Defect Indication:  
- Microprocessor writes a 1 to TnRDIPp.  
- Microprocessor writes a 1 to TnRDICp.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 65 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
OVERHEAD COMMUNICATIONS BIT ACCESS  
Microprocessor access is provided for the eight overhead communications bits (O-bits) carried in the two justi-  
fication control (JC) bytes in the multiframe format, e.g., in a 2048 kbit/s TU/VT, shown partially below. The bits  
in the justification control byte are numbered 1 through 8, starting with C1 as bit 1.  
Other  
Bytes  
J2 Byte  
JC Byte 1  
C1  
C2  
O
O
O
O
R
R
32 Bytes - Information  
R
R
R
O
R
R
R
O
R
R
R
R
N2 (Z6) Byte  
JC Byte 2  
C1  
C2  
O
O
Other  
Bytes  
O-bit Placement in a 2048 kbit/s TU/VT  
In the receive direction, the eight O-bits are stored in eight 8-bit registers (A and B for each group of 4 ports)  
and these registers are updated each frame. The two O-bit nibbles that form a byte in the registers for receiving  
and transmitting are from the same multiframe. Bits 3 through 0 in an O-bit register correspond to bits 3  
through 6 (C1C2 OOOO RR) in the first justification control byte, and bits 7 through 4 in an O-bit register corre-  
spond to bits 3 through 6 in the second justification control byte, as shown below.  
Second Justification Control Byte  
First Justification Control Byte  
Bit  
3
7
4
6
5
5
6
4
3
3
4
2
5
1
6
0
Register  
O-bit Assignment Memory Map  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 66 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
J2 BYTE PROCESSING  
There are two possible received J2 message sizes, 16 bytes (ITU-T), or 64 bytes (ANSI). The E1Mx16 is capa-  
ble of dimensioning the transmit (and receive) RAM memory segment to the two sizes (16-byte or 64-byte). In  
addition, two modes of operation are provided for the 16-byte (ITU-T) format: a microprocessor read mode,  
and a compare read mode. The following table lists the various control states associated with J2 processing.  
J2nSIZEp  
J2nCOMp  
Action  
0
0
Transmit and receive J2 segments are configured for  
the 16-byte J2 message size. Microprocessor read for  
the dropped J2 message. J2 alarms are disabled.  
0
1
1
Transmit and receive J2 segments are configured for  
the 16-byte J2 message size. For receiving, a 16-byte  
microprocessor message is written into a 16-byte seg-  
ment for comparison against the received message.  
The written message must start with the multiframe  
indicator written into the starting location of the seg-  
ment.  
X
Transmit and receive J2 segments are configured for  
the 64-byte J2 message size. Microprocessor read for  
the dropped J2 message. J2 alarms are disabled. The  
tandem connection feature must be disabled by setting  
TCnENp=0 for the port.  
Note: X = Dont Care  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 67 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
The ITU-T defined 16-byte message consists of an alignment signal of (10000000 00000000) in the most sig-  
nificant bit (bit 1) of the message. The remaining 7 bits in each byte carry a data message, as illustrated below.  
Bit  
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16-Byte J2 Message  
ITU-T 16-Byte J2 Message Format  
The definitions (ITU-T) shown below will be used in the following discussion of the J2 16-byte message com-  
parison function. The memory locations apply to each memory group.  
ITU-T Definitions  
E1Mx16 Definitions  
RxTI - Received TTI (Trail Trace Identifier)  
Incoming J2 trace message (Real Time)  
ExTI - Expected TTI (Trail Trace Identifier) Microprocessor-written trace (reference) message. A Side (X50H - X5FH)  
B Side (XD0H - XDFH)  
AcTI - Accepted TTI (Trail Trace Identifier)  
Received stable trace message. A Side (X40H - X4FH)  
B Side (XC0H - XCFH)  
The J2 16-byte message comparison works according to the following steps:  
1. The microprocessor-written reference message (ExTI) locations should be initialized with the correct J2  
16-byte message before enabling the J2 message comparison function.  
2. The J2 message comparison function is then enabled (J2nCOMp = 1; J2nSIZEp = 0) and immediately the  
J2 Loss of Lock alarm will be active (J2nLOLp = 1) and the J2 Trace Identifier Mismatch alarm will be inac-  
tive (J2nTIMp = 0). This is the first step in the sequence - to initialize these alarms.  
3. The incoming trace message (RxTI) is received, and the J2 comparison circuit searches for the J2 align-  
ment pattern (Bit 1: 1000...0 pattern).  
4. J2 alignment pattern is found and the Received stable trace message (AcTI) locations are updated with  
this incoming trace message (RxTI).  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 68 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
5. The incoming trace message (RxTI) is then checked for three consecutive 16-byte message repeats.  
6. If an error occurs before step 5 is completed, the sequence repeats, starting at step 3 (searching for the  
alignment pattern).  
7. If the incoming trace message (RxTI) repeats three times in a row (after the alignment pattern is detected)  
without an error then this is an in-lock condition, and the J2 Loss of Lock alarm is reset (J2nLOLp = 0).  
Note that at this time the J2 mismatch alarm is still inactive (J2nTIMp =0).  
8. Once the incoming trace message is in-lock, the stable message (AcTI), is compared against the micro-  
processor-written reference message (ExTI), byte for byte, for 16 bytes (the length of the multiframe mes-  
sage). If they compare (AcTI = ExTI), a match is declared, with no mismatch alarm (J2nTIMp = 0). If they  
do not compare (AcTI ExTI), a mismatch alarm is declared (J2nTIMp = 1). A J2 mismatch alarm results  
in RDI and receive line AIS being sent continuously, when enabled. There is no Loss of Lock alarm  
(J2nLOLp = 0) because the incoming trace message (RxTI) is stable.  
10. If the incoming message (RxTI) changes for three consecutive 16-byte messages, a loss of lock alarm  
(J2nLOLp = 1) occurs and the sequence starts again from the beginning (step 2).  
Summary of J2 Alarms:  
- J2 Loss of Lock (J2nLOLp) is a comparison between the Received stable message (AcTI) and the  
Receive incoming (real time) message (RxTI).  
- Declare Lock (J2nLOLp = 0) when AcTI = RxTI for 3 consecutive set of 16 bytes.  
- Loss of Lock (J2nLOLp = 1) when AcTI RxTI on at least 1 byte in each of 3 consecutive 16-byte  
messages  
- J2 Trace Identifier Mismatch (J2nTIMp) is a comparison between the Received stable message  
(AcTI) and the microprocessor-written reference message (ExTI).  
- Declare Mismatch (J2nTIMp = 1) when AcTI ExTI on any byte once lock is declared.  
- Clear Mismatch (J2nTIMp = 0) when AcTI = ExTI. See Note below.  
Note: A mismatch alarm is declared for the following reasons.  
1) A valid mismatch alarm would be declared when the stable message (AcTI) does not match the reference  
message (ExTI).  
2) An invalid mismatch alarm would be declared if the correct start-up procedure was not used and the refer-  
ence message (ExTI) was not loaded before enabling the J2 comparison function.  
3) Another reason for getting an invalid mismatch alarm would be if the reference message was written with  
the wrong message value.  
In any case if the incoming message is stable (or In-Lock - J2nLOLp = 0) then the only way to clear the mis-  
match alarm would be to cause a Loss of Lock condition.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 69 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Suggested J2 16-byte Message Comparison Start-up Procedure:  
From Start-up:  
1) At transmitting device - Send a validmessage (TxTI).  
2) At receive device -a) Load microprocessor-written reference message (ExTI) with a validmessage.  
b) Enable J2 Message Comparison.  
Note: 1 and 2 are interchangeable  
If Changing Messages:  
1) At receive device - Load microprocessor-written reference message (ExTI) with a new validmessage.  
2) At transmitting device - Send a new validmessage (TxTI).  
Note: If 1 is not done before 2 then a mismatch alarm is declared. If this occurs it is not a valid mismatch  
(assuming that the messages are correct).  
Following the start-up procedure above will assure that the Trace Identifier Mismatch alarm only activates  
when the messages do not match. There is the possibility that a mismatch alarm will activate by not following  
the correct start-up procedure, upon which the following should be done:  
1) At Receive device - verify that microprocessor-written (reference) message (ExTI) is correct  
2) At Receive device - verify that the stable message (AcTI) is correct by examining J2nLOLp. Since AcTI  
is written only once at the beginning of the algorithm, when searching for the J2 alignment pattern, if no  
Loss of Lock alarm is set then the incoming message RxTI is still the same valid message in AcTI. Now  
force a Loss of Lock condition by using the microprocessor to overwrite any byte of the stable message  
(AcTI) with a value that corrupts the alignment pattern (i.e., address X40=0x00). The Loss of Lock alarm  
will set, and then the re-start the algorithm from the beginning, which resets the mismatch alarm, and  
starts searching again for the alignment pattern.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 70 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
N2 (Z6) BYTE PROCESSING (Tandem Connection)  
The Tandem Connection feature is enabled for a TU/VT by writing a 1 to control bit TCnENp, when control bit  
J2nSIZEp is a 0. When control bit TCnENp is written with a 0, the tandem connection feature is disabled. See  
address 051H, bit 4 of each memory group, in the Memory Map Descriptions section for more detail on  
TCnENp. The bit placement in a received N2 (Z6) byte is as shown below:  
Bit  
1
2
3
1
4
5
6
7
8
AIS  
Indication  
TC  
REI  
TC OEI  
(FEBE)  
Trace ID  
TC RDI/ODI  
BIP-2  
BIP-2, AIS Indication, TC REI and TC OEI Processing  
One or two errors may be detected in the TC BIP-2 comparison, and they are counted individually in an 8-bit  
counter when control bit BLOCKp is written with a 0 (An TC BIP-2 Error Counter, Bn TC BIP-2 Error Counter).  
When control bit BLOCKp is written with a 1, one or two parity errors are counted as a single block error.  
A tandem connection AIS alarm (AnTCAISp, BnTCAISp) is declared when bit 4 is equal to 1 for five consecu-  
tive frames. Recovery occurs when bit 4 is equal to 0 for five consecutive frames.  
An 8-bit counter (An TC REI Counter, Bn TC REI Counter) is provided for counting the number of REI bits  
received as equal to 1 in bit 5 (TC REI) in the N2 (Z6) byte. A REI indication (a 1) indicates that the distant end  
has detected one or two errors when the BIP-2 calculated for frame f-1 (all the bytes) is compared against the  
BIP-2 value carried in the N2 (Z6) byte in frame f.  
An 8-bit counter (An TC OEI Counter, Bn TC OEI Counter) is provided for counting the number of OEI bits  
received as equal to 1 in bit 6 (TC OEI) in the N2 (Z6) byte. An OEI indication (a 1) indicates that the distant  
end has detected one or two errors when the BIP-2 calculated for frame f-1 is compared against the BIP-2  
value carried in the V5 byte in frame f.  
Bits 7 and 8  
A multiframe alignment pattern, a trace identifier message, and TC RDI and TC ODI indications are assigned  
to bits 7 and 8 in the frames of a 76-frame structure, as shown below:  
Frame No.  
1 - 8  
N2 (Z6) Byte, Bits 7 and 8 Definition  
Frame Alignment, 1111 1111 1111 1110  
9 - 12  
TC Trace ID Byte No. 0 (1 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7)  
TC Trace ID Byte No. 1 (0 X X X X X X X)  
TC Trace ID Byte No. 2 (0 X X X X X X X)  
13 - 16  
17 - 20  
21 - 24 thru 61 - 64 TC Trace ID Bytes No. 3 thru 13  
65 - 68  
69 - 72  
73  
TC Trace ID Byte No. 14 (0 X X X X X X X)  
TC Trace ID Byte No. 15 (0 X X X X X X X)  
Bit 7 = 0, Bit 8 = TC RDI  
Bit 7 = TC ODI, Bit 8 = 0  
Bit 7 = 0, Bit 8 = 0  
74  
75  
76  
Bit 7 = 0, Bit 8 = 0  
Loss of multiframe (status bits AnTCLMp, BnTCLMp) occurs when four consecutive Frame Alignment Signals  
(1111 1111 1111 1110) are detected in error (i.e., one or more errors in each FAS). Multiframe alignment is  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 71 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
recovered when three consecutive non-errored FAS are found.  
The TC trace identifier message comparison is based on the same state machine as that used for the 16-byte  
J2 message. If the message is not locked, an AnTCLLp or BnTCLLp alarm is declared. After TC lock is estab-  
lished, a comparison is performed between the microprocessor-written TC and the contents of the incoming  
message. The message consists of TC Trace ID bytes 0 to 15. A TC Trace Identifier Mismatch (AnTCTMp,  
BnTCTMp) alarm is declared when any byte does not match. Recovery occurs when there is a match between  
the microprocessor message and the accepted message.  
Bit 8 in frame 73 is defined as a Tandem Connection Remote Defect Indication (TC RDI). A TC RDI alarm  
occurs when a 1 has been detected in bit 8 in frame 73 for 5 consecutive multiframes (where each multiframe  
is 38 ms). The TC RDI alarm state is exited when bit 8 is equal to 0 for 5 consecutive multiframes. An alarm  
indication is reported as AnTCRDIp or BnTCRDIp.  
Bit 7 in frame 74 is defined as a Tandem Connection Outgoing Defect Indication (TC ODI). A TC ODI alarm  
occurs when a 1 has been detected in bit 7 in frame 74 for 5 consecutive multiframes (where each multiframe  
is 38 ms). The TC ODI alarm state is exited when bit 7 is equal to 0 for 5 consecutive multiframes. An alarm  
indication is reported as AnTCODIp or BnTCODIp.  
Tandem Connection Unequipped Status  
Unequipped Tandem Connection detection is provided. Five or more consecutive received tandem connection  
N2 (Z6) bytes equal to XX00 0000 result in a TC unequipped indication (AnTCUQp, BnTCUQp). The alarm  
state is exited when five or more consecutive received tandem connection N2 (Z6) bytes are not equal to XX00  
0000 (X is a dont care). Note that bits 1 and 2 of the N2 (Z6) byte are not taken into consideration and do not  
affect the unequipped indication.  
TUG-3 NULL POINTER INDICATOR  
For STM-1 TUG-3 format, the E1Mx16 has the option to generate and transmit a Null Pointer Indicator (NPI) for  
one or more of the TUG-3s, as shown below.  
TUG-3A  
TUG-3B  
TUG-3C  
1
86  
1
86  
1
86  
N
P
I
N
P
I
N
P
I
VC-4  
P
O
H
1
261  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 72 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
NPI Structure  
Three control bits (NPIAp, NPIBp and NPICp in address 010H, bits 2-0 of each memory group) are provided  
for selecting one or more of the TUG-3 NPIs. The three control bits are enabled when the MOD1p and MOD0p  
control bits are 11 (TUG-3/VC-4 format). The NPI consists of three bytes, starting with row 1. The table below  
shows the bit assignment for the first two bytes.  
Bit  
Row 1  
Row 2  
1
1
1
2
0
1
3
0
1
4
1
0
5
0
0
6
0
0
7
1
0
8
1
0
NPI Bit Assignment  
The third NPI byte is designated as fixed stuff and is transmitted as zero. The remaining cross-hatched bytes in  
the first two columns of the TUG-3 are tristated on the add bus. When a 1 is written to control bit NULLZp in  
address 013H, bit 3 of each memory group and the NPI feature is enabled (i.e., NPIAp, NPIBp or NPICp is a 1)  
the bytes following the NPI bytes are transmitted as zeros. When the NULLZp bit is a 0, the bytes following the  
NPI bytes are tristated.  
E1 LOOPBACK CAPABILITY  
The E1Mx16 provides two types of E1 loopbacks, called facility and line loopbacks (i.e., at the facility side and  
at the line side, as illustrated in Figure 17). In Figure 17, the E1 Transmit Data and Clock goes into the  
E1Mx16, while the E1 Receive Data and Clock comes out of the E1Mx16. Facility loopback for port n of group  
p, enabled when a 1 is written to control bit FnLBKp, directs the incoming E1 Transmit Data and Clock to the  
outgoing Receive Data and Clock signal. Line loopback for port n, enabled when a 1 is written to control bit  
LnLBKp, routes the outgoing E1 Receive Data and Clock signal (instead of the incoming E1 Transmit Data and  
Clock) to the SDH/SONET transmitter.  
FnLBKp  
BYPASnp  
REC  
NRC  
From  
0
1
NRZ  
Rail  
Desynchronizer  
ANAnOOLp  
1
0
Receive  
Data & Clock  
(NRZ, Rail)  
0
1
PRBS  
Analyzer  
HDB3  
Coder  
ANAnENp  
Facility  
Loopback  
Line  
Loopback  
ANAnTxp  
E1 LINE  
1
0
XMIT  
NRZ  
NRZ  
NRZ  
HDB3  
Coder  
0
1
Transmit  
Data & Clock  
(NRZ, Rail)  
0
1
To  
PRBS  
Generator  
Synchronizer  
LnLBKp  
BYPASnp  
PRBSnENp  
Clock  
Figure 17. Facility and Line Loopbacks  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 73 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
PRBS PATTERN GENERATOR AND ANALYZER  
Each port has a data generator and analyzer for 215-1 PRBS patterns, as illustrated in Figure 17. The PRBS  
generator is enabled when a 1 is written to control bit PRBSnENp. The PRBS pattern will be synchronous to  
the clock driving the HDB3 decoder. When a 1 is written to ANAnENp control bit, the PRBS analyzer is  
enabled. When control bit ANAnTxp is 0, the analyzer will sample the receive NRZ clock and data (REC NRZ)  
signals. When the control bit ANAnTxp is 1, the internal transmit NRZ clock and data signals (XMIT NRZ) will  
be sampled by the analyzer.  
RESETS  
The E1Mx16 has several reset options. These include a full hardware and software device reset, partial soft-  
ware resets, and counter software resets. All of the software reset bits are self-clearing (i.e., they do not require  
0 to be written to a register location after the reset is applied by setting the bit to 1). Note that the self-clearing  
function requires the presence of the clock signal provided to the EXTCK lead.  
Upon power-up, when the RESETp bit (address 015H, bit 7 of each memory group) is written with a 1, or an  
active low signal is placed on the common RESET lead, the add bus data and the port E1 interfaces are forced  
to a high impedance state until the device is initialized. The control bits AAHZEp and BAHZEp (address 010H,  
bits 5 and 4 of each memory group) must be written with zeros to enable the add bus interfaces. The RnENp  
control bits must be programmed to 1 to activate the line interfaces. In addition, the AAINDp, BAINDp, AADDp  
and BADDp leads are forced off. All performance counters are reset, and the alarms (except AnLOPp and  
BnLOPp) are reset. The control bits (except those shaded in the Memory Map) are also forced to zero, and the  
various FIFOs are re-initialized. The shaded bits are contained in the Data RAM, and these can be initialized  
by writing a 1 to INITSPp (see Memory Map Descriptions, address 015H, bit 0). A hardware reset can only be  
applied after the clocks are stable, and must be present for a minimum duration of 150 ns.  
Writing a 1 to the RnSETSp software reset control bit for any of the ports resets the port n performance  
counters, re-initializes the FIFO, and clears the alarms, except the AnLOPp and BnLOPp alarms, which will set  
for port n. The loss of pointer alarms will recover when a valid pointer is received. The control bits will not be  
reset.  
Writing a 1 to the RnSETCp counter reset control bit for any of the ports resets the performance counters for  
that port. This feature allows the performance measurements to start at the same time for a port.  
Writing a 1 to control bit RESTABp (address 015H, bit 6) resets the alarms for the A bus and for LEXTCp (i.e.,  
addresses 022H to 025H of each memory group). Writing a 1 to control bit RESTBBp (address 015H, bit 5 of  
each memory group) resets the alarms for the B bus and the SPOT alarms (i.e., addresses 026H to 028H of  
each memory group).  
Note that a hardware reset will automatically trigger all the software reset bits. Software reset bit RESETp will  
trigger all RnSETSp, all RnSETCp, RESTABp and RESTBBp automatically. A RnSETSp will also automatically  
trigger a RnSETCp.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 74 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
START-UP PROCEDURE  
The following procedure should be followed to start up the E1Mx16 in a known good state from initial power-on,  
or from a hardware or software reset.  
Initial power-on: ---------------- (start from step 1)  
From a hardware reset: ------ (start from step 2)  
From a software reset: ------- (start from step 4)  
(1) Power up Device  
(2) Apply Hardware Reset (lead B4)  
(3) Load SPOT microcode (see flowchart in Figure 23)  
(4) Apply Software Reset (RESETp=1; register 0x015 = 0x80 of each memory group)  
(5) Initialize Data RAM (INITSPp=1; register 0x015 = 0x01 of each memory group)  
(6) Load all Control Registers for user specific operation  
(7) Clear any alarms that may have been latched, by generating the following resets:  
- RESTABp and RESTBBp (register 0x015 = 0x60 of each memory group)  
- R1SETSp (register 0x052 = 0x80 of each memory group)  
- R2SETSp (register 0x082 = 0x80 of each memory group)  
- R3SETSp (register 0x0B2 = 0x80 of each memory group)  
- R4SETSp (register 0x0E2 = 0x80 of each memory group)  
(8) Clear AnLOPp and BnLOPp by reading the corresponding Port Status Registers:  
- Clear A1LOPp (read register 0x030 of each memory group)  
- Clear A2LOPp (read register 0x060 of each memory group)  
- Clear A3LOPp (read register 0x090 of each memory group)  
- Clear A4LOPp (read register 0x0C0 of each memory group)  
- Clear B1LOPp (read register 0x03A of each memory group)  
- Clear B2LOPp (read register 0x06A of each memory group)  
- Clear B3LOPp (read register 0x09A of each memory group)  
- Clear B4LOPp (read register 0x0CA of each memory group)  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 75 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
POINTER LEAK RATE CALCULATIONS  
10 SEC  
Measure  
Set FIFO  
Leak Rate  
to 04 Hex  
(Note 3)  
Calculate  
FIFO  
Leak Rate  
(Note 5)  
10 SEC  
1 Second,  
add to C  
(Note 4)  
Start  
AIS, LOP  
LOS, NDF  
or RESET  
Set FIFO  
Leak Rate  
(Note 6)  
Subt Oldest  
Add Newest  
(Note 7)  
Measure  
1 Second  
(Note 6)  
Notes:  
1. The procedure described in Notes 2 through 8 below must be performed independently for each of the four ports in each  
memory group of the E1Mx16 device.  
2. The procedure shown in the diagram above uses a ten-second sliding window with a resolution of one second.  
3. The initial FIFO Leak Rate Register value (in memory map address 049H, 079H, 0A9H or 0D9H of each memory group)  
must first be set to 04 Hex.  
4. Measure ten consecutive one-second samples from the Positive and Negative Stuff Counters being used. Store all ten  
difference values, i.e.,  
S1 = POS STUFF COUNT1 - NEG STUFF COUNT1,  
S2 = POS STUFF COUNT2 - NEG STUFF COUNT2, and so on through  
S10 = POS STUFF COUNT10 - NEG STUFF COUNT10.  
There are eight pairs of stuff counters in the E1Mx16; care should be taken to use the pair appropriate to the pro-  
grammed configuration of the device. The counters are located at addresses 032H, 062H, 092H, 0C2H (A side) and  
03CH, 06CH, 09CH, 0CCH (B side).  
5. Calculate the leak rate (L.R.) using the following equation:  
L.R. = Hex[ Int [ 280 / C ] ], where  
C = ABS [ S1 + S2 + ... + S10 ].  
Then, if L.R. < 4, let L.R. = 4,  
or if L.R. > 255, let L.R. = 255.  
6. Set the FIFO Leak Rate Register (address 049H, 079H, 0A9H or 0D9H of each memory group) with the value between  
4 and 255 calculated above, then take another one-second sample (e.g., S11).  
7. Recalculate the value of 'C' by subtracting the oldest sample and adding the newest, and calculate a new leak rate, as  
described in Note 5 (e.g., using S2 through S11).  
8. Continue to repeat the steps described in Notes 5, 6 and 7 until AIS, LOP, LOS or NDF is received or until you reset the  
E1Mx16.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 76 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
JITTER MEASUREMENTS  
Equipment used in E1Mx16 jitter measurements:  
Hewlett-Packard Digital Transmission Analyzer:  
Anritsu Digital Transmission Analyzer:  
Anritsu STM/SONET Analyzer:  
HP-3784A  
ME520B  
MP1560A  
The following table lists the filter characteristics defined by specification:  
Specifications  
G.703 Interface  
Filter Characteristics  
f1  
f3  
f4  
(High Pass)  
(High Pass)  
(Low Pass)  
2048 kbit/s  
Filter Used  
20 Hz  
18 kHz  
100 kHz  
20 dB/decade 20 dB/decade -20 dB/decade  
HP1 HP2 LP  
Jitter Tolerance Test  
The jitter tolerance test is performed by inserting various jitter levels at selected frequencies into the 2.048  
Mbit/s line input of the E1Mx16, as shown in the table below and Figure 20. Data is looped back at the SDH/  
SONET interface and dropped by the same E1Mx16 device. The measured value is the maximum input jitter  
that the E1Mx16 can tolerate at its input without generating bit errors in the loopback path. Figure 21 is a plot  
of the measured data listed in the table together with the requirement.  
Input Jitter Frequency  
10 Hz  
Requirement  
Maximum Input Jitter  
Tolerated (UI-PP)  
>1.5 UI  
> 1.5 UI  
> 0.2 UI  
> 0.2 UI  
10 UI  
2.3 UI  
2.2 UI  
1.0 UI  
2.4 kHz  
18 kHz  
100 kHz  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 77 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 18. Jitter Tolerance and Jitter Test Arrangements  
Receiver  
PDH  
External  
Loopback  
155 Mbit/s  
2.048 Mbit/s  
E 1 Interface  
E1Mx16  
Digital  
Test Fixture  
Transmission  
Analyzer  
Transmitter  
Figure 19. Jitter Tolerance Measurements with Requirement  
10  
1
Measured  
(Min)  
Required  
0.1  
10  
100  
1000  
10000  
100000  
Input Jitter Frequency, Hz  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 78 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Jitter Transfer Test  
A fixed jitter level of 1.0 UI is inserted into the transmitted E1 signal. The jitter value measured is achieved  
using the HP1/LP filter in the PDH receiver. The jitter transfer measurements are provided in the following  
table and Figure 20.  
Input Jitter  
Frequency  
Filter Used  
Jitter Transfer  
(UI - PP, max)  
Unit Interval  
1.0 UI  
10 Hz  
f1-f4  
(HP1/LP)  
0.172 UI  
0.127 UI  
0.117 UI  
0.099 UI  
0.076 UI  
0.075 UI  
50 Hz  
1.0 UI  
100 Hz  
200 Hz  
600 Hz  
1.0 UI  
1.0 UI  
1.0 UI  
1000 Hz  
1.0 UI  
Figure 20. Jitter Transfer Measurements  
10.0  
1.0  
Input  
Measured  
0.1  
0.0  
10  
100  
1000  
Input Jitter Frequency  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 79 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Mapping Jitter Measurement  
The following table lists the mapping jitter measurements, which are made with a SDH/SONET Analyzer  
replacing the 155 Mbit/s loopback in Figure 18.  
G.703  
Interface  
Filter Characteristics  
Maximum Output Jitter (UI-PP)  
Requirement Measured Value  
2048 kbit/s  
f1-f4 (HP1/LP)  
f3-f4 (HP2/LP)  
(Note 1)  
0.032  
0.024  
< 0.075 UI  
Note 1: These values are for further study.  
Combined Jitter Measurement  
The following table lists the combined jitter measurements.  
Pointer Test Sequence  
Filter  
Leak  
Rate  
(Hex)  
Maximum Output Jitter  
(UI - PP)  
Requirement  
Measured  
(Note 1)  
1
2
3
4
1
Single Pointers of Opposite Polarity  
f1-f4  
(HP1/LP)  
01H  
12H  
12H  
16H  
01H  
12H  
12H  
16H  
< 0.4  
(Note 2)  
0.019  
0.169  
0.169  
0.164  
0.009  
0.009  
0.009  
0.009  
Regular Pointers Plus One Double Pointer  
Regular Pointers with One Missing Pointer  
Double Pointers of Opposite Polarity  
Single Pointers of Opposite Polarity  
f3-f4  
(HP2/LP)  
< 0.075  
(Note 2)  
Regular Pointers Plus One Double Pointer  
Regular Pointers with One Missing Pointer  
Double Pointers of Opposite Polarity  
Note 1: These values are written into the Desynchronizer Pointer Leak Rate Register for mapper  
port n (register address 049, 079, 0A9, 0D9 hex, for n = 1 - 4).  
Note 2: The limit corresponds to the pointer sequences shown in Figure 21 for Standard Pointer Test  
Sequences, (T1 > 10 s, T2 > 0.75 s, T3 = 30 ms). The T3 value was constrained by test  
equipment limitations.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 80 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 21. Standard Pointer Test Sequences  
T1  
Single Pointers of  
Opposite Polarity  
T3  
T2  
T2  
Regular Pointers  
plus one Double Pointer  
Regular Pointers with one  
Missing Value  
T3  
T1  
Double Pointers of  
Opposite Polarity  
T3  
(Ref: ITU-T G.783, Fig 6-2)  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 81 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
INTERNAL SPOT PROCESSORS  
The internal SPOT processors of the E1Mx16 device are SONET Processors for Overhead Termination. The  
purpose of the SPOT processors is to relieve the devices internal logic of the need to support relatively slow  
functions like performance monitoring and alarm handling. The utility of this feature will grow as communica-  
tions standards require tighter control of data flow and network management. In addition, as boards become  
more densely populated with VLSI components, the availability of the SPOT processors will help by reducing  
the requirement for external components and the workload of the main processor (and the software engineers  
who program it).  
Each of the four SPOT processors is a programmable core which adheres to Reduced Instruction Set  
Computer (RISC) principles. It executes one instruction per clock cycle. Instructions are simple, performing  
data movement, basic arithmetic functions (8-bit integer operations, but no multiply/divide) and program  
control. The executable code required for operation of the SPOT processor and associated descriptive text are  
available as files on a diskette (see Ordering Information section for part number) or via the Products page of  
the TranSwitch Internet World Wide Web site at www.transwitch.com, where the files are provided in ZIP  
format.  
Each SPOT processor is designed to run at 29.16 MHz. This clock is internally derived from the 58.32 MHz  
desynchronizer clock input (EXTCK). The Instruction RAM (I-RAM) has 2048 words of 16 bits while the Data  
RAM (D-RAM) has 2048 words of 8 bits. Each SPOT processor has access to the Microprocessor Interface  
and the Add/Drop Engines of the E1Mx16 via an 8-bit data bus, as shown in Figure 22. Each SPOT processor  
is event-driven, with each client independently and asynchronously requesting service. These maskable  
requests are surveyed by a task queue and prioritized by function (Add, Drop, Line). When idle, each SPOT  
processor polls the task queue to identify the next client to be serviced. This results in a call to the appropriate  
subroutine(s). During each subroutine, each SPOT processor may transfer data to/from the Add/Drop Engines  
or the Microprocessor Interface. Each SPOT processor will make decisions regarding control/status and  
update any necessary counters and other Data RAM locations. The subroutine is terminated by returning to  
the idle loop, and the cycle is then repeated.  
The E1 data paths (i.e., for the Add/Drop Engines) are implemented in free-running hardware, and are there-  
fore not dependent on the SPOT processor.  
The Data RAM contains important information about the status of the E1 channels. Performance counters, J2  
messages, etc., are all stored there. The external microprocessor is granted access to the internal Data RAM  
when addressing the appropriate locations. Since RAM access is arbitrated, the grant will not be immediate,  
and the RDYp/DTACKp signal is de-asserted until the requested data becomes available.  
Since each SPOT processor is effectively a very large state machine, it could enter an unforeseen state (e.g.,  
due to a software bug or RAM corruption) which prevents it from servicing all requests in a timely manner.  
Although the data path is not interrupted, the path overhead bytes may not be correctly processed under these  
conditions. Two status bits have been provided to detect critical errors which are indications of this status:  
Parity Error (PERRp) in bit 4 of addresses 028H and 029H of each memory group  
indicates that a parity error has occurred in reading the Instruction RAM.  
Watchdog Timer Expired (WDTEXPp) in bit 6 of addresses 028H and 029H of each  
memory group indicates that the SPOT processor may be unable to service all  
requests in a timely manner. Some possible causes for this condition are excessive  
microprocessor accesses, a SPOT processor clock that is running too slowly, or a  
software bug.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 82 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Upon power-up or hardware reset, the contents of the Instruction RAM are assumed to be invalid and execu-  
tion of the SPOT program is internally disabled. Before a SPOT processor can begin processing, the micropro-  
cessor must reprogram the Instruction RAM, using the instructions described in the following table, by  
performing the procedure described in the flowchart in Figure 23. Each of the four SPOT processors is  
selected by placing a low on the microprocessor bus interface lead SELp (p=1-4). Each of the four SPOT pro-  
cessors must be programmed using the procedure following the table below.  
Table 1: Reprogram Functions (valid only when control bit RPSPOTp at bit 7 in address 007H is a 1)  
Microprocessor  
Interface Address*  
Function  
wrPC  
Direction  
Description  
write  
read  
read  
write  
read  
102H  
102H  
103H  
100H  
100H  
IRAMptr <== SPOTPCLDp(10-0)  
read IRAMptr[7:0]  
rdPC0  
rdPC1  
read IRAMptr[10:8]  
IRAMwr  
IRAMrd  
*IRAMptr++ <== data  
data <== *IRAMptr++  
*Note: Address map locations represent each of the mapper groups p (p=1-4) in the E1Mx16.  
The 11-bit SPOT PC Load register SPOTPCLDp at address 007H bits 2-0 of each memory group and address  
006H bits 7-0 of each memory group is first initialized. This is an offset address into the Instruction RAM. It  
may not be necessary always to write/read the entire program, but for normal operation this register should be  
set to 000H.  
In order to access the Instruction RAM, set to 1 the Reprogram SPOT control bit RPSPOTp at bit 7 in address  
007H of each memory group. At this time the Data RAM is off-line (i.e., it is inaccessible to the microproces-  
sor), but all register-based locations are still available. SPOT program execution is disabled when RPSPOTp is  
a 1.  
Function "wrPC" causes the Instruction RAM word pointer to be loaded from the SPOT PC Load register. Each  
SPOT processor automatically increments the Instruction RAM word pointer, which allows the microprocessor  
to write all instructions to one address (100H). Since the length of the Instruction RAM is 2048 16-bit words,  
4096 IRAM 8-bit write functions ("IRAMwr") are required to program a SPOT processor completely. Transwitch  
provides the 4096 bytes of code that will implement the features mentioned in this document.  
It is recommended, but not required, that the writes to the Instruction RAM should be verified as part of the ini-  
tialization procedure. As shown in the flowchart, it is necessary only to use the instruction "wrPC" to reload the  
I-RAM word pointer and then perform 4096 I-RAM read cycles using the same fixed data location (100H) as  
that used for write (function "IRAMrd").  
The programming procedure is completed by setting control bit RPSPOTp to 0. At this point, the word pointer is  
reloaded and execution of the SPOT processor program execution is enabled. It is important to set control bit  
INITSPp at address 015H, bit 0 to 1 at some time after programming each SPOT processor. This will cause  
each SPOT processor to execute an initialization subroutine from the Instruction RAM that will initialize the  
Data RAM and reset its general purpose registers to allow other subroutines to begin running from a known  
state.  
Note: Programming may be performed in parallel for the four SPOT processors, but verification must be performed on each  
SPOT processor individually.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 83 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 22. Schematic Diagram of E1Mx16 Showing SPOT Processor Interfaces  
SDH/SONET  
SIDE  
LINE SIDE  
DROP Engine  
Drop[A]  
Rx Port  
Drop[B]  
RAM  
I/F  
Inst.  
Data  
RAM RAM  
µP I/O  
Control/Status  
µP Interface  
SPOT  
ADD Engine  
Add[A]  
Tx Port  
Add[B]  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 84 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Figure 23. Recommended Implementation Flowchart for Reprogramming the SPOT Processor  
Initialize  
LATENp = 0  
HDWIEp = 1  
SPTMSKp = 1  
SPOTPCLDp=000H  
RPSPOTp = 1  
wrPC  
102H = 00H  
Write next byte  
No more data?  
n
100H = data  
y
wrPC  
102H = 00H  
Read next byte  
No more data?  
n
data = 100H  
y
Wrap Up  
RPSPOTp = 0  
Note: RESTSPp must be 0 during reprogramming.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 85 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
BOUNDARY SCAN  
Introduction  
The Boundary Scan Interface Block provide a five-lead Test Access Port (TAP) that conforms to the IEEE  
1149.1 standard. This standard provides external boundary scan functions to read and write the external I/O  
leads from the TAP for board and component test.  
The IEEE 1149.1 standard defines the requirements of a boundary scan architecture that has been specified  
by the IEEE Joint Test Action Group (JTAG). Boundary scan is a specialized scan architecture that provides  
observability and controllability for the interface leads of the device. As shown in Figure 24, one cell of a  
boundary scan register is assigned to each input or output lead to be observed or tested (bidirectional leads  
may have two cells). The boundary scan capability is based on a Test Access Port (TAP) controller, instruction  
and bypass registers, and a boundary scan register bordering the input and output leads. The boundary scan  
test bus interface consists of four input signals (Test Clock (TCK), Test Mode Select (TMS), Test Data Input  
(TDI) and Test Reset (TRS)) and a Test Data Output (TDO) output signal. Boundary scan signal timing is  
shown in Figure 14.  
The TAP controller receives external control information via a Test Clock (TCK) signal and a Test Mode Select  
(TMS) signal, and sends control signals to the internal scan paths. Detailed information on the operation of this  
state machine can be found in the IEEE 1149.1 standard. The serial scan path architecture consists of an  
instruction register, a boundary scan register and a bypass register. These three serial registers are connected  
in parallel between the Test Data Input (TDI) and Test Data Output (TDO) signals, as shown in Figure 24.  
The boundary scan function can be reset and disabled by holding lead TRS low. When boundary scan testing  
is not being performed the boundary scan register is transparent, allowing the input and output signals to pass  
to and from the E1Mx16 devices internal logic. During boundary scan testing, the boundary scan register may  
disable the normal flow of input and output signals to allow the device to be controlled and observed via scan  
operations.  
Boundary Scan Operation  
The maximum frequency the E1Mx16 device will support for boundary scan is 10 MHz. The timing diagrams  
for the boundary scan interface leads are shown in Figure 14.  
The instruction register contains twelve bits. The E1Mx16 device performs the following three boundary scan  
test instructions:  
The EXTEST test instruction (000000000000) provides the ability to test the connectivity of the  
E1Mx16 device to external circuitry.  
The SAMPLE test instruction (010010010010) provides the ability to examine the boundary  
scan register contents without interfering with device operation.  
The BYPASS test instruction (111111111111) provides the ability to bypass the E1Mx16  
boundary scan and instruction registers.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 86 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Boundary Scan Reset  
Specific control of the TRS lead is required in order to ensure that the boundary scan logic does not interfere  
with normal device operation. This lead must either be held low, asserted low, or asserted low then high  
(pulsed low), to asynchronously reset the Test Access Port (TAP) controller during power-up of the E1Mx16. If  
boundary scan testing is to be performed and the lead is held low, then a pull-down resistor value should be  
chosen which will allow the tester to drive this lead high, but still meet the VIL requirements listed in the Input,  
Output and Input/Output Parameterssection of this Data Sheet for worst case leakage currents of all devices  
sharing this pull-down resistor.  
Boundary  
Scan Register  
CORE  
LOGIC  
CORE  
LOGIC  
2
3
Instruction Register  
Bypass Register  
Instruction Register  
Bypass Register  
TAP Controller  
TAP Controller  
Signal input and  
output leads  
(solder balls on  
bottom surface  
of PBGA package)  
CORE  
LOGIC  
CORE  
LOGIC  
1
4
Instruction Register  
Bypass Register  
Instruction Register  
Bypass Register  
TAP Controller  
TAP Controller  
TDI  
TDO  
3
TCK TMS TRS  
Controls  
OUT  
IN  
Boundary Scan  
Serial Test Data  
Figure 24. Boundary Scan Schematic  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 87 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Boundary Scan Chain  
The E1Mx16 contains four identical QE1M VLSI chips, each of which has its own boundary scan chain. Since  
these chips drive common input and output leads, it is not feasible to develop a BSDL file for the overall device.  
Instead, to facilitate customer testing of the E1Mx16, TranSwitch has developed a module-level test approach  
that utilizes a device net list1 (prepared in a Teradyne tester format) and the BSDL2 file for the QE1M, modified  
to suit the E1Mx16 application. The associated files and explanatory material are combined in a .ZIP file for-  
mat. This file, together with other E1Mx16 product documentation, is available on the TranSwitch Internet Web  
site (www.transwitch.com). It can be located by using the "Product Finder" segment on the Home page to  
select Product Name E1Mx16, or by entering E1Mx16 in the Search box and selecting the first response.  
MULTIPLEX FORMAT AND MAPPING INFORMATION  
STS-1 VT2 (2.048 Mbit/s) Multiplex Format Mapping  
The following diagram and table illustrate the mapping of the 21 VT2s into an STS-1 SPE. Column 1 is  
assigned to carry the path overhead bytes.  
VT2  
1
4 COLUMNS  
1
5
2
3
4
2
3
36  
36  
1
J1  
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
B3  
C2  
G1  
F2  
H4  
Z3  
Z4  
Z5  
VT VT  
VT VT VT  
VT VT VT  
VT VT  
VT  
2
2
#
1
2
#
2
2
#
2
#
1
2
#
2
2
#
2
#
1
2
#
2
2
#
2
#
1
#
21  
21  
21  
21  
R
R
2
23  
30  
45  
59  
67  
87  
1. The net list is a text file that describes the interconnections of the four chips within the device and  
their connections to the E1Mx16 package leads.  
2. The Boundary Scan Description Language (BSDL) file describes the Boundary Scan Chain for the  
silicon chip of the E1Mx16 device. This must be used four times to provide complete coverage of all  
Boundary Scan cells in the E1Mx16.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 88 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
STS-1 Mapping (2.048 Mbit/s)  
RTUNnp, TTUNnp Locations1  
04CH, 04DH Port 1 0ACH, 0ADH Port 3  
07CH, 07DH Port 2 0DCH, 0DDH Port 4  
VT2  
VT#  
Column Numbers2  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
No VT Selected  
2, 23, 45, 67  
3, 24, 46, 68  
4, 25, 47, 69  
5, 26, 48, 70  
6, 27, 49, 71  
7, 28, 50, 72  
8, 29, 51, 73  
9, 31, 52, 74  
10, 32, 53, 75  
11, 33, 54, 76  
12, 34, 55, 77  
13, 35, 56, 78  
14, 36, 57, 79  
15, 37, 58, 80  
16, 38, 60, 81  
17, 39, 61, 82  
18, 40, 62, 83  
19, 41, 63, 84  
20, 42, 64, 85  
21, 43, 65, 86  
22, 44, 66, 87  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
Notes:  
1. Address map locations represent each of the mapper groups p (p=1-4) in the E1Mx16.  
2. Columns 30 and 59 carry fixed stuff bytes. Column 1 is assigned for the POH bytes.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 89 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
STS-3/AU-3 VT2/TU-12 (2.048 Mbit/s) Multiplex Format Mapping  
The following diagram and table illustrate the mapping of the 63 VT2/TU-12s into an STS-3/AU-3 SPE. Each  
STS-3 carries three STS-1s. Column 1 in each STS-1/AU-3 is assigned to carry the path overhead bytes.  
VT2  
1
4 COLUMNS  
1
5
2
3
4
2
3
36 BYTES  
36  
35 36  
1
23  
29 30  
44 45  
VT VT  
59 60  
66 67  
VT VT  
87  
1
87  
1
87  
J1  
B3  
C2  
G1  
F2  
H4  
Z3  
Z4  
Z5  
R
R
R
R
J1  
J1  
B3  
C2  
G1  
F2  
H4  
Z3  
Z4  
Z5  
B3  
C2  
G1  
F2  
H4  
Z3  
Z4  
Z5  
VT  
2
VT  
2
#
1
VT  
2
VT  
VT  
2
#
21  
VT VT  
VT  
2
#
42  
VT VT  
VT  
2
#
63  
R
R
2
#
2
#
1
2
2
#
2
#
1
2
#
2
#
2
#
2
#
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
#
#
7
#
15  
1
21  
21  
22 23  
43 44  
1
261  
STS-3/AU-3 SPE  
Note: Columns 88, 89, 90, 175, 176 and 177 are fixed stuff.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 90 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
STS-3/AU-3 Mapping (2.048 Mbit/s)  
RTUNnp, TTUNnp  
04CH, 04DH Port 1  
RTUNnp, TTUNnp  
04CH, 04DH Port 1  
RTUNnp, TTUNnp  
04CH, 04DH Port 1  
TU/ 07CH, 07DH Port 2  
VT 0ACH, 0ADH Port 3  
STS-3/AU-3  
Column  
Numbers  
TU/ 07CH, 07DH Port 2  
VT 0ACH, 0ADH Port 3  
STS-3/AU-3  
Column  
Numbers  
TU/ 07CH, 07DH Port 2  
VT 0ACH, 0ADH Port 3  
STS-3/AU-3  
Column  
Numbers  
2
2
2
#
0DCH, 0DDH Port 4  
#
0DCH, 0DDH Port 4  
#
0DCH, 0DDH Port 4  
1
1
1
Registers  
Registers  
Registers  
6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
0 1 0 0 1 0 1  
0 1 0 1 0 0 1  
0 1 0 1 1 0 1  
0 1 1 0 0 0 1  
0 1 1 0 1 0 1  
0 1 1 1 0 0 1  
0 1 1 1 1 0 1  
0 1 0 0 1 1 0  
0 1 0 1 0 1 0  
0 1 0 1 1 1 0  
0 1 1 0 0 1 0  
0 1 1 0 1 1 0  
0 1 1 1 0 1 0  
0 1 1 1 1 1 0  
0 1 0 0 1 1 1  
0 1 0 1 0 1 1  
0 1 0 1 1 1 1  
0 1 1 0 0 1 1  
0 1 1 0 1 1 1  
0 1 1 1 0 1 1  
0 1 1 1 1 1 1  
No TU/VT Selected  
5, 68, 134, 200  
8, 71, 137, 203  
11, 74, 140, 206  
14, 77, 143, 209  
17, 80, 146, 212  
20, 83, 149, 215  
23, 86, 152, 218  
26, 92, 155, 221  
29, 95, 158, 224  
32, 98, 161, 227  
1
2
4, 67, 133, 199  
7, 70, 136, 202  
10, 73, 139, 205  
13, 76, 142, 208  
16, 79, 145, 211  
19, 82, 148, 214  
22, 85, 151, 217  
25, 91, 154, 220  
28, 94, 157, 223  
31, 97, 160, 226  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
1 0 0 0 1 0 1  
1 0 0 1 0 0 1  
1 0 0 1 1 0 1  
1 0 1 0 0 0 1  
1 0 1 0 1 0 1  
1 0 1 1 0 0 1  
1 0 1 1 1 0 1  
1 0 0 0 1 1 0  
1 0 0 1 0 1 0  
1 0 0 1 1 1 0  
1 0 1 0 0 1 0  
1 0 1 0 1 1 0  
1 0 1 1 0 1 0  
1 0 1 1 1 1 0  
1 0 0 0 1 1 1  
1 0 0 1 0 1 1  
1 0 0 1 1 1 1  
1 0 1 0 0 1 1  
1 0 1 0 1 1 1  
1 0 1 1 0 1 1  
1 0 1 1 1 1 1  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
1 1 0 0 1 0 1  
1 1 0 1 0 0 1  
1 1 0 1 1 0 1  
1 1 1 0 0 0 1  
1 1 1 0 1 0 1  
1 1 1 1 0 0 1  
1 1 1 1 1 0 1  
1 1 0 0 1 1 0  
1 1 0 1 0 1 0  
1 1 0 1 1 1 0  
1 1 1 0 0 1 0  
1 1 1 0 1 1 0  
1 1 1 1 0 1 0  
1 1 1 1 1 1 0  
1 1 0 0 1 1 1  
1 1 0 1 0 1 1  
1 1 0 1 1 1 1  
1 1 1 0 0 1 1  
1 1 1 0 1 1 1  
1 1 1 1 0 1 1  
1 1 1 1 1 1 1  
6, 69, 135, 201  
9, 72, 138, 204  
3
12, 75, 141, 207  
15, 78, 144, 210  
18, 81, 147, 213  
21, 84, 150, 216  
24, 87, 153, 219  
27, 93, 156, 222  
30, 96, 159, 225  
33, 99, 162, 228  
36, 102, 165, 231  
39, 105, 168, 234  
42, 108, 171, 237  
45, 111, 174, 240  
48, 114, 180, 243  
51, 117, 183, 246  
54, 120, 186, 249  
57, 123, 189, 252  
60, 126, 192, 255  
63, 129, 195, 258  
66, 132, 198, 261  
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
34, 100, 163, 229 32  
37, 103, 166, 232 33  
40, 106, 169, 235 34  
43, 109, 172, 238 35  
46, 112, 178, 241 36  
49, 115, 181, 244 37  
52, 118, 184, 247 38  
55, 121, 187, 250 39  
58, 124, 190, 253 40  
61, 127, 193, 256 41  
64, 130, 196, 259 42  
35, 101, 164, 230 53  
38, 104, 167, 233 54  
41, 107, 170, 236 55  
44, 110, 173, 239 56  
47, 113, 179, 242 57  
50, 116, 182, 245 58  
53, 119, 185, 248 59  
56, 122, 188, 251 60  
59, 125, 191, 254 61  
62, 128, 194, 257 62  
65, 131, 197, 260 63  
STS-1 #1, AU-3 A  
STS-1 #2, AU-3 B  
STS-1 #3, AU-3 C  
Notes:  
1. Address map locations represent each of the mapper groups p (p=1-4) in the E1Mx16.  
2. Columns 88, 89, 90, 175, 176 and 177 are fixed stuff.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 91 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
STM-1/VC-4 TU-12 (2048 kbit/s) Multiplex Format Mapping  
The following diagram and table illustrate the mapping of the 63 TU-12s into an STM-1/VC-4. The E1Mx16  
provides control bits for enabling the Null Pointer Indicators (NPIs) for the columns indicated.  
4 COLUMNS  
1
2
3
1
5
2
3
4
TU-12 #1  
36  
36  
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
TUG-2 #1  
1
3
1
24  
45  
66  
86  
7
1
86  
14  
1
86  
21  
N
P
I
N
P
I
N
P
I
7
1
7
1
7
1
8
15  
TUG-3A  
TUG-3B  
TUG-3C  
VC-4  
P
O
H
1
261  
STM-1/VC-4  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 92 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
STM-1 VC-4 Mode (2048 kbit/s)  
RTUNnp, TTUNnp  
04CH, 04DH Port 1  
07CH, 07DH Port 2  
0ACH, 0ADH Port 3  
0DCH, 0DDH Port 4  
Registers*  
RTUNnp, TTUNnp  
04CH, 04DH Port 1  
07CH, 07DH Port 2  
0ACH, 0ADH Port 3  
0DCH, 0DDH Port 4  
Registers*  
RTUNnp, TTUNnp  
04CH, 04DH Port 1  
07CH, 07DH Port 2  
0ACH, 0ADH Port 3  
0DCH, 0DDH Port 4  
Registers*  
VC-4  
Column  
Numbers  
VC-4  
Column  
Numbers  
VC-4  
Column  
Numbers  
TU  
#
TU  
#
TU  
#
6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
6 5 4 3 2 1 0  
0 0 0 0 0 0 0  
0 1 0 0 1 0 1  
0 1 0 1 0 0 1  
0 1 0 1 1 0 1  
0 1 1 0 0 0 1  
0 1 1 0 1 0 1  
0 1 1 1 0 0 1  
0 1 1 1 1 0 1  
0 1 0 0 1 1 0  
0 1 0 1 0 1 0  
0 1 0 1 1 1 0  
0 1 1 0 0 1 0  
0 1 1 0 1 1 0  
0 1 1 1 0 1 0  
0 1 1 1 1 1 0  
0 1 0 0 1 1 1  
0 1 0 1 0 1 1  
0 1 0 1 1 1 1  
0 1 1 0 0 1 1  
0 1 1 0 1 1 1  
0 1 1 1 0 1 1  
0 1 1 1 1 1 1  
No TU Selected  
11, 74, 137, 200  
14, 77, 140, 203  
17, 80, 143, 206  
20, 83, 146, 209  
23, 86, 149, 212  
26, 89, 152, 215  
29, 92, 155, 218  
32, 95, 158, 221  
35, 98, 161, 224  
1
2
10, 73, 136, 199 22  
1 0 0 0 1 0 1  
1 0 0 1 0 0 1  
1 0 0 1 1 0 1  
1 0 1 0 0 0 1  
1 0 1 0 1 0 1  
1 0 1 1 0 0 1  
1 0 1 1 1 0 1  
1 0 0 0 1 1 0  
1 0 0 1 0 1 0  
1 0 0 1 1 1 0  
1 0 1 0 0 1 0  
1 0 1 0 1 1 0  
1 0 1 1 0 1 0  
1 0 1 1 1 1 0  
1 0 0 0 1 1 1  
1 0 0 1 0 1 1  
1 0 0 1 1 1 1  
1 0 1 0 0 1 1  
1 0 1 0 1 1 1  
1 0 1 1 0 1 1  
1 0 1 1 1 1 1  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
1 1 0 0 1 0 1  
1 1 0 1 0 0 1  
1 1 0 1 1 0 1  
1 1 1 0 0 0 1  
1 1 1 0 1 0 1  
1 1 1 1 0 0 1  
1 1 1 1 1 0 1  
1 1 0 0 1 1 0  
1 1 0 1 0 1 0  
1 1 0 1 1 1 0  
1 1 1 0 0 1 0  
1 1 1 0 1 1 0  
1 1 1 1 0 1 0  
1 1 1 1 1 1 0  
1 1 0 0 1 1 1  
1 1 0 1 0 1 1  
1 1 0 1 1 1 1  
1 1 1 0 0 1 1  
1 1 1 0 1 1 1  
1 1 1 1 0 1 1  
1 1 1 1 1 1 1  
12, 75, 138, 201  
15, 78, 141, 204  
18, 81, 144, 207  
21, 84, 147, 210  
24, 87, 150, 213  
27, 90, 153, 216  
30, 93, 156, 219  
33, 96, 159, 222  
36, 99, 162, 225  
39, 102, 165, 228  
42, 105, 168, 231  
45, 108, 171, 234  
48, 111, 174, 237  
51, 114, 177, 240  
54, 117, 180, 243  
57, 120, 183, 246  
60, 123, 186, 249  
63, 126, 189, 252  
66, 129, 192, 255  
69, 132, 195, 258  
72, 135, 198, 261  
13, 76, 139, 202  
16, 79, 142, 205  
19, 82, 145, 208  
22, 85, 148, 211  
25, 88, 151, 214  
28, 91, 154, 217  
31, 94, 157, 220  
34, 97, 160, 223  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
37, 100, 163, 226 31  
40, 103, 166, 229 32  
43, 106, 169, 232 33  
46, 109, 172, 235 34  
49, 112, 175, 238 35  
52, 115, 178, 241 36  
55, 118, 181, 244 37  
58, 121, 184, 247 38  
61, 124, 187, 250 39  
64, 127, 190, 253 40  
67, 130, 193, 256 41  
70, 133, 196, 259 42  
38, 101, 164, 227 52  
41, 104, 167, 230 53  
44, 107, 170, 233 54  
47, 110, 173, 236 55  
50, 113, 176, 239 56  
53, 116, 179, 242 57  
56, 119, 182, 245 58  
59, 122, 185, 248 59  
62, 125, 188, 251 60  
65, 128, 191, 254 61  
68, 131, 194, 257 62  
71, 134, 197, 260 63  
*Note: Address map locations represent each of the mapper groups p (p=1-4) in the E1Mx16.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 93 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
MEMORY MAP  
The E1Mx16 memory map consists of counters and register bit positions which may be accessed by the micro-  
processor. There are 4 common groups that provide control and status bits common to groups of 4 mapper  
channels each and 16 individual channel groups that provide the control and status bits for each mapper chan-  
nel. These four groups are selected by placing a low on the microprocessor bus interface leads SELp (p=1-4).  
The group is selected by SELp, where p selects the group of channels (p=1 selects channels 1-4, p=2 selects  
channels 5-8, p=3 selects channels 9-12 and p=4 selects channels 13-16).The memory map segment consists  
of 7FF (hex) address locations for each of the four groups. Address locations in the range 000H - 7FFH that are  
shown as unused, or are unlisted, must not be accessed by the microprocessor. Unused bit positions within  
register locations will contain unspecified values when read, unless a 0 or 1 value is indicated in the tables  
below, or the address can be written by the microprocessor, in which case unused bit positions must always be  
set to 0. All counters saturate at full count and are cleared when they are read. The 4 common groups should  
be set to the same values for p=1-4. The 16 individual channel groups may be independently set and the 16  
TU/VT select locations must be set to different values for proper operation.  
The common memory map segment consists of the Device ID, Program ID, Internal Processor, Control, Provi-  
sioning, Interrupt Indication, and Interrupt Status registers. The A bus segment consists of the A Drop and Add  
status registers. The B bus segment consists of the B Drop and Add status registers. Each Port n memory map  
segment (where n = 1-4) consists of the Desynchronizer, Provisioning, Status and Operations registers, and  
various counters. There are also Port n registers for J2 and N2 (Z6) message segments. n = 1-4 corresponds  
to the four channels of the parent group.  
Some memory locations, at addresses 032H and above, are shown shaded in the memory map. These loca-  
tions reside in the 2k x 8 Data RAM of the internal SPOT processors and are not reset by the software or hard-  
ware resets but only by INITSPp. They are subject to arbitrated access by both the internal SPOT processors  
and the external microprocessor. An attempt to access any of these locations will toggle the RDYp/DTACKp  
output lead to pause the external microprocessor until the location is available for external access. While con-  
trol bit RPSPOTp is set to 1, these locations are assigned to use by the associated SPOT processor and must  
not be accessed by the external microprocessor unless they are addresses designated for microprocessor  
access while the SPOT processor is being reprogrammed (i.e., addresses 100H, 102H and 103H). Refer to  
Figures 10 through 13 and the notes associated with these figures for more information.  
DEVICE ID  
Address  
Status*  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
(Hex)  
000  
001  
002  
003  
004  
R
R
R
R
R
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
Revision (Version) Level  
Mask Level (reads as 0000)  
Growth (reads as 0000)  
PROGRAM ID (p=1-4)  
Address  
Status*  
(Hex)  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
6BD  
6BE  
6BF  
R/W Program Revision Checksum/execution flag (PID-CHKp)  
R/W Part 1 of two-part program release number (PGMRV1p)  
R/W Part 2 of two-part program release number (PGMRV2p)  
* R=Read Only; R(L)=Read Only (Latched); R/W=Read/Write; W=Write Only.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 94 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
INTERNAL PROCESSOR SPOT (p=1-4))  
Address  
Status*  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
(Hex)  
005  
006  
007  
008  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
TranSwitch Test Register(p) - (set to 00H)  
SPOTPCLDp (7 - 0)  
RPSPOTp  
TranSwitch Test Bits(p) - (set to 0000)  
SPOTPCLDp (10 - 8)  
TranSwitch Test Register(p) - (set to 00H)  
COMMON REGISTERS - CONTROLS (p=1-4)  
Address  
Status*  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
NPIAp  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
NPICp  
(Hex)  
010  
011  
012  
013  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
MOD1p  
MOD0p AAHZEp BAHZEp BLOCKp  
NPIBp  
SBTENp DRPBTp  
ADDIp APEp  
ABDp  
LATENp TAISEp  
INEGp RFIEp  
TCLKIp RAISEp RCLKIp  
THRSBYp  
IPOSp  
DPEp  
PDDOp  
R/W HEAISEp DV1SELp DV1REFp RDIENp NULLZp DDINDp UQAEp TOBWZp  
COMMON REGISTERS - PROVISIONING CONTROL (p=1-4))  
Address  
Status*  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
(Hex)  
014  
015  
0F1  
0F5  
R/W  
W
Unused(p) - (set to 000)  
UEAMEp SE1AISp V5AL10p PTALTEp HDWIEp  
INITSPp  
RESETp RESTABp RESTBBp RESTSPp  
Unused(p) - (set to 000)  
R/W  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
V4ENp  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R/W TxB2DISp  
COMMON REGISTERS - INTERRUPT INDICATION (p=1-4)  
Address  
Status*  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
(Hex)  
020  
R
INTp  
EXTCKp ASIDEp BSIDEp PORT4p PORT3p PORT2p PORT1p  
COMMON REGISTERS - INTERRUPT MASK (p=1-4)  
Address  
Status*  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
(Hex)  
SPTMSKp  
016  
017  
018  
019  
021  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
RPT4Ap RPT4Bp RPT3Ap RPT3Bp RPT2Ap RPT2Bp RPT1Ap RPT1Bp  
TFIFO4Ap TFIFO4Bp TFIFO3Ap TFIFO3Bp TFIFO2Ap TFIFO2Bp TFIFO1Ap TFIFO1Bp  
TPORT4p TPORT3p TPORT2p TPORT1p RFIFO4p RFIFO3p RFIFO2p RFIFO1p  
ECKMSKp  
0
ASMSKp BSMSKp P4MSKp P3MSKp P2MSKp P1MSKp  
* R=Read Only; R(L)=Read Only (Latched); R/W=Read/Write; W=Write Only.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 95 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
A/B DROP AND ADD BUS REGISTERS - DESYNCHRONIZER AND INTERNAL PROCESSOR (SPOT)  
STATUS (p=1-4)  
Address  
(Hex)  
Status*  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
022  
023  
024  
025  
026  
027  
028  
029  
R(L) ADLOCp AALOCp ADPARp  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
A3UAISIp A2UAISIp A1UAISIp  
A3UAISIp A2UAISIp A1UAISIp  
A3DH4Ep A2DH4Ep A1DH4Ep  
A3DH4Ep A2DH4Ep A1DH4Ep  
B3UAISIp B2UAISIp B1UAISIp  
B3UAISIp B2UAISIp B1UAISIp  
B3DH4Ep B2DH4Ep B1DH4Ep  
B3DH4Ep B2DH4Ep B1DH4Ep  
R
R(L)  
R
ADLOCp AALOCp ADPARp  
0
LEXTCp  
LEXTCp  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
R(L) BDLOCp BALOCp BDPARp  
R
R(L)  
R
BDLOCp BALOCp BDPARp  
0
SPTLOCp WDTEXPp  
SPTLOCp WDTEXPp  
0
0
PERRp  
PERRp  
DESYNCHRONIZER CONTROL - PORT n (p=1-4)  
Address  
Status*  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Port 1, 2, 3, 4  
049 079 0A9 0D9  
R/W  
Desynchronizer Pointer Leak Rate Register(np)  
PROVISIONING (CONTROL) - PORT n (p=1-4)  
Address  
Status*  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Port 1, 2, 3, 4  
04A 07A 0AA 0DA  
04B 07B 0AB 0DB  
04C 07C 0AC 0DC  
04D 07D 0AD 0DD  
USCHnEp BYPASnp  
R/W TnSEL1p TnSEL0p RnSELp UCHnEp  
RnENp  
0
ANAnENp PRBSnENp FRDISnp  
R/W ADnENp BDnENp AAnENp BAnENp ANAnTxp  
R/W  
R/W  
0
0
Receive TU/VT Select - (RTUNnp)  
Transmit TU/VT Select - (TTUNnp)  
* R=Read Only; R(L)=Read Only (Latched); R/W=Read/Write; W=Write Only.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 96 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
STATUS REGISTERS AND COUNTERS - PORT n (A SIDE) (p=1-4)  
Address  
Status* Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Port 1, 2, 3, 4  
030 060 090 0C0  
031 061 091 0C1  
032 062 092 0C2  
033 063 093 0C3  
034 064 094 0C4  
035 065 095 0C5  
04E 07E 0AE 0DE  
04F 07F 0AF 0DF  
036 066 096 0C6  
037 067 097 0C7  
038 068 098 0C8  
039 069 099 0C9  
05A 08A 0BA 0EA  
05B 08B 0BB 0EB  
100 200 300 400  
101 201 301 401  
102 202 302 402  
116 216 316 416  
AnUNEQp AnSLERp  
AnUNEQp AnSLERp  
R(L)  
R
AnAISp AnLOPp AnSIZEp AnNDFp AnRDISp AnRFIp  
AnAISp AnLOPp AnSIZEp AnNDFp AnRDISp AnRFIp  
R
AnPJ Counter(p)  
AnNJ Counter(p)  
R
AnBIP2 Error Counter(p)  
AnFEBE Counter(p)  
R
R
Unused(np)  
An Rx Label(p)  
AnJ2LOLp AnJ2TIMp  
AnJ2LOLp AnJ2TIMp  
Unused(np)  
R(L) AnRDIPp AnRDICp Unused(np) (00)  
Unused(np) (00)  
Unused(np) (00)  
R
R
AnRDIPp AnRDICp Unused(np) (00)  
R
Unused(np)  
R
An Receive K4 (Z7) Byte(p)  
An Receive O-Bits(p)  
R
AnTCODIp AnTCRDIp  
AnTCUQp AnTCAISp AnTCLMp  
AnTCUQp AnTCAISp AnTCLMp  
AnTCTMp  
AnTCTMp  
R(L)  
R
AnTCLLp  
AnTCLLp  
0
AnTCODIp AnTCRDIp  
0
R
An TC BIP-2 Error Counter(p)  
An TC REI Counter(p)  
An TC OEI Counter(p)  
An Receive V4 Byte(p)  
R
R
R
* R=Read Only; R(L)=Read Only (Latched); R/W=Read/Write; W=Write Only.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 97 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
RECEIVE STATUS REGISTERS AND COUNTERS - PORT n (B SIDE) (p=1-4)  
Address  
Status*  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Port 1, 2, 3, 4  
03A 06A 09A 0CA  
03B 06B 09B 0CB  
03C 06C 09C 0CC  
03D 06D 09D 0CD  
03E 06E 09E 0CE  
03F 06F 09F 0CF  
05E 08E 0BE 0EE  
05F 08F 0BF 0EF  
040 070 0A0 0D0  
041 071 0A1 0D1  
042 072 0A2 0D2  
043 073 0A3 0D3  
05C 08C 0BC 0EC  
05D 08D 0BD 0ED  
180 280 380 480  
181 281 381 481  
182 282 382 482  
196 296 396 496  
BnUNEQp BnSLERp  
BnUNEQp BnSLERp  
R(L)  
R
BnAISp BnLOPp BnSIZEp BnNDFp BnRDISp BnRFIp  
BnAISp BnLOPp BnSIZEp BnNDFp BnRDISp BnRFIp  
R
BnPJ Counter(p)  
BnNJ Counter(p)  
R
BnBIP2 Error Counter(p)  
BnFEBE Counter(p)  
R
R
Unused(np)  
Bn Rx Label(p)  
BnJ2LOLp BnJ2TIMp  
BnJ2LOLp BnJ2TIMp  
Unused(np)  
R(L) BnRDIPp BnRDICp Unused(np) (00)  
Unused(np) (00)  
Unused(np) (00)  
R
R
BnRDIPp BnRDICp Unused(np) (00)  
R
Unused(np)  
R
Bn Receive K4 (Z7) Byte(p)  
Bn Receive O-Bits(p)  
R
BnTCODIp BnTCRDIp  
BnTCUQp BnTCAISp BnTCLMp  
BnTCUQp BnTCAISp BnTCLMp  
BnTCTMp  
BnTCTMp  
R(L)  
R
BnTCLLp  
BnTCLLp  
0
BnTCODIp BnTCRDIp  
0
R
Bn TC BIP-2 Error Counter(p)  
Bn TC REI Counter(p)  
Bn TC OEI Counter(p)  
Bn Receive V4 Byte(p)  
R
R
R
STATUS REGISTERS - PORT n (A AND B SIDES) (p=1-4)  
Address  
Status*  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Port 1, 2, 3, 4  
044 074 0A4 0D4  
045 075 0A5 0D5  
046 076 0A6 0D6  
047 077 0A7 0D7  
ANAnOOLp  
ANAnOOLp  
R(L) RnFFEp  
0
0
TAnFEp TBnFEp TnLOSp TnLOCp TnDAISp  
TAnFEp TBnFEp TnLOSp TnLOCp TnDAISp  
R
R
R
RnFFEp  
Port n HDB3 Coding Errors(p) (Low Byte)  
Port n HDB3 Coding Errors(p) (High Byte)  
* R=Read Only; R(L)=Read Only (Latched); R/W=Read/Write; W=Write Only.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 98 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
OPERATIONS (CONTROL) REGISTERS - PORT n (p=1-4)  
Address  
Status*  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Port 1, 2, 3, 4  
048 078 0A8 0D8  
050 080 0B0 0E0  
051 081 0B1 0E1  
052 082 0B2 0E2  
053 083 0B3 0E3  
054 084 0B4 0E4  
055 085 0B5 0E5  
056 086 0B6 0E6  
057 087 0B7 0E7  
058 088 0B8 0E8  
059 089 0B9 0E9  
511 591 611 691  
J2nSIZEp J2nCOMp  
R/W  
R/W  
Unused(np) (set to 000)  
1BnRDIp J2nTENp  
J2nAISEp  
TnVTAISp  
FnLBKp LnLBKp RnAISp TnAISp  
TnRFIp TnRDISp TnRDIPp  
TCnAENp  
R/W TCnRDIp TCnODIp TCnAISp TCnENp TCnREp TCnOEp  
TnRDICp  
RnSETSp RnSETCp  
W
Unused(np) (set to 0000)  
TnFB2p TnFFBp  
An µP Mismatch Label(p)  
Bn µP Mismatch Label(p)  
Tn TX Label(p)  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Unused(np) (set to 00000)  
Unused(np) (set to 00000)  
Unused(np) (set to 00000)  
Unused(np)  
Unused(np)  
Transmit K4 (Z7) Byte Value(np) (4-7) Unused(np) - (set to 000)  
TZ7BVnp(0)  
Transmit O-Bits(p) - Port n  
Transmit V4 Bytes(p) - Port n  
J2 AND N2 (Z6) MESSAGE SEGMENTS - PORT n (p=1-4)  
Address  
Status* Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Port 1, 2, 3, 4  
140 240 340 440  
to  
R/W  
Port n Group p  
A side J2 64-byte trace message received (X40 - X7F)  
17F 27F 37F 47F  
or  
A side J2 16-byte trace message received (X40 - X4F)  
A side J2 16-byte microprocessor-written trace message (X50 - X5F)  
A side TC (N2 (Z6)) 16-byte trace message received (X60 - X6F)  
A side TC (N2 (Z6)) 16-byte microprocessor-written trace message (X70 - X7F)  
1C0 2C0 3C0 4C0 R/W  
Port n Group p  
to  
B side J2 64-byte trace message received (XC0 - XFF)  
or  
1FF 2FF 3FF 4FF  
B side J2 16-byte trace message received (XC0 - XCF)  
B side J2 16-byte microprocessor-written trace message (XD0 - XDF)  
B side TC (N2 (Z6)) 16-byte trace message received (XE0 - XEF)  
B side TC (N2 (Z6)) 16-byte microprocessor-written trace message (XF0 - XFF)  
540 5C0 640 6C0  
to  
R/W  
Port n Group p  
J2 64-byte trace message transmitted  
57F 5FF 67F 6FF  
(540 - 57F Port 1, 5C0 - 5FF Port 2, 640 - 67F Port 3, 6C0 - 6FF Port 4)  
or  
J2 16-byte trace message transmitted  
(540-54F Port 1, 5C0-5CF Port 2, 640-64F Port 3, 6C0-6CF Port 4)  
TC (N2 (Z6)) 16-byte trace message transmitted  
(560-56F Port 1, 5E0-5EF Port 2, 660-66F Port 3, 6E0-6EF Port 4)  
Where X = 1 for Port 1, 2 for Port 2, 3 for Port 3, 4 for Port 4.  
* R=Read Only; R(L)=Read Only (Latched); R/W=Read/Write; W=Write Only.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 99 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
MEMORY MAP DESCRIPTIONS  
COMMON REGISTERS - PROGRAM ID (p=1-4)  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
6BD  
7-0  
PID-CHKp This value (register 6BEH + register 6BFH + 55 hex) is written by SPOT  
during initialization, and at the start of each maintenance cycle (2 kHz  
rate). The external microprocessor can read this checksum to validate  
the revision numbers in registers 6BEH and 6BFH. By writing this loca-  
tion with a different value, waiting at least 1 ms, and then reading this  
location, the external microprocessor can determine whether the SPOT  
program is running.  
6BE  
6BF  
7-0  
7-0  
PGMRV1p* Part 1 of two-part program release number.  
PGMRV2p* Part 2 of two-part program release number.  
*
Registers 6BEH and 6BFH contain the two-part SPOT program release number. In documentation, this number is writ-  
ten as PGMRV1p, PGMRV2p.  
COMMON REGISTERS - INTERNAL PROCESSOR (SPOT (p=1-4))  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
TranSwitch Test Register:  
005  
006  
7-0  
7-0  
These bits must be written to 0.  
SPOTPCLDp  
(7-0)  
Internal SPOT Processor Load Register:  
These bits are the lower 8  
bits of the 11-bit register which is used as the offset address access for  
the SPOT Instruction RAM. During normal operation these bits must be  
written to 0.  
Reprogram Internal SPOT Processor Control Bit:  
This bit is written to  
007  
7
RPSPOTp  
1 for accessing the SPOT Instruction RAM. During normal operation this  
bit must be written to 0.  
TranSwitch Test Bits:  
6-3  
2-0  
These bits must be written to 0.  
Internal SPOT Processor Load Register:  
SPOTPCLDp  
(10-8)  
These bits are the upper 3  
bits of the 11-bit register which is used as the offset address access for  
the SPOT Instruction RAM. During normal operation these bits must be  
written to 0.  
TranSwitch Test Register  
: These bits must be written to 0.  
008  
7-0  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 100 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
COMMON REGISTERS - CONTROL DESCRIPTIONS (p=1-4)  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
The format selection is made according to the table  
Format Selection:  
given below.  
010  
7
6
MOD1p  
MOD0p  
MOD1p MOD0p Format Selected  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
STS-1 Format  
STS-3 Format  
STM-1/AU-3 Format  
STM-1/TUG-3/VC-4 Format  
A Add Bus High Impedance Enable:  
A 1 forces the A-side add bus  
5
4
3
AAHZEp  
BAHZEp  
BLOCKp  
data output to a high impedance state. Upon power-up, or on a hardware  
or software reset, this bit is set to a 1. Note: For normal bus operation  
this bit position must be written with a 0. See Note 1.  
B Add Bus High Impedance Enable:  
A 1 forces the B-side add bus  
data output to a high impedance state. Upon power-up, or on a hardware  
or software reset, this bit is set to a 1. Note: For normal bus operation  
this bit position must be written with a 0. See Note 1  
Block Count:  
A 1 enables two BIP-2 errors to be counted as a single  
error (block) for the BIP-2 performance counters (V5 and K4 (Z7) bytes).  
A 0 enables two BIP-2 errors to be counted as two errors.  
Null Pointer Indicator Selection:  
A 1 enables a null pointer indicator to  
2
1
0
NPIAp  
NPIBp  
NPICp  
be generated for the corresponding TUG-3 when control bits MOD1p  
and MOD0p are a 1 (STM-1/TUG-3/VC-4 format). A null pointer indicator  
is carried in the first three bytes of column 1 in a TUG-3. The null pointer  
indicator byte values are 93H, E0H and 00H. A 0 forces the NPI byte  
position to a high impedance state on the A/B buses.  
Note 1:The add bus will be forced to a high impedance state automatically when loss of clock is detected on the transmit  
clock signal selected by control bit DRPBTp in register 011H.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 101 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Software Bus Timing Enable:  
011  
7
SBTENp  
This bit works in conjunction with control  
bit DRPBTp in bit 6 and the ABUST lead according to the following table  
(where X = Dont Care):  
SBTENp DRPBTp ABUST  
Action  
0
0
1
X
X
0
Low  
High  
X
Add bus timing selected. Add bus data  
derived from add bus timing signals.  
Software control of bus timing disabled.  
Drop bus timing selected. Add bus data  
derived from like-named drop bus.  
Software control of bus timing disabled.  
Add bus timing selected. Add bus data  
derived from add bus timing signals.  
Hardware control of bus timing dis-  
abled.  
1
1
X
Drop bus timing selected. Add bus data  
derived from like-named drop bus.  
Hardware control of bus timing dis-  
abled.  
This SBTENp bit is reset to 0 upon power-up and by a device reset.  
Drop Bus Timing:  
Enabled when a 1 is written to control bit SBTENp. A  
1 selects the drop bus timing mode, while a 0 selects the add bus timing  
mode. See table above.  
6
5
DRPBTp  
ABDp  
Add Bus Delay:  
A 0 delays the add bus data with respect to the drop  
bus by one clock cycle, when the drop bus or add bus timing modes are  
selected. A 1 delays the add bus data with respect to the drop bus or add  
bus by one additional clock cycle, for a total of two clock cycles.  
Latch On Transitions Enable Bit:  
A 0 disables the states of the IPOSp  
4
3
2
LATENp  
TAISEp  
TCLKIp  
and INEGp control bits, and causes the event alarm bits (latched alarm  
bits in the registers) to latch on the positive (1) level of an alarm. A 1  
enables the states of the IPOSp and INEGp control bits in register 012H.  
Transmit E1 Line AIS Enable:  
A common control for all four ports. A 1  
enables an E1 AIS (unframed all ones) to be generated and sent from  
port n to the SDH/SONET side when an E1 line input loss of signal, or  
loss of clock, occurs for port n.  
Transmit E1 Line Clock Inversion:  
A common control for the four ports.  
A 0 enables transmit data to be clocked in on the negative (falling) clock  
edges. A 1 enables transmit data to be clocked in on the positive (rising)  
clock edges.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 102 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Receive E1 Line AIS Enable:  
A common control for the four ports. A 1  
011  
1
RAISEp  
(cont.)  
enables a receive E1 AIS to be sent from port n when internal defined  
alarms occur for a port n. An E1 AIS is an unframed all ones signal. For  
example, receive AIS for port 1 will be generated:  
- When R1SELp is 0 and any of:  
- Loss of pointer detected (A1LOPp)  
- VT AIS detected (A1AISp)  
- A Drop Bus Loss Of Clock (ADLOCp)  
- A Drop Bus Upstream AIS detected (AsUAISIp) when HEAISEp is 1.  
- or when R1SELp is 0 and RAISEp is 1 (drop VT from A side) and any of:  
- A Drop H4 Error (AsDH4Ep) when DV1SELp is 0  
- Unequipped signal label (A1UNEQp) and UQAEp is 1  
- Mismatch signal label (A1SLERp)  
- J2 Loss Of Lock Alarm (A1J2LOLp) when J21COMp and J21AISEp  
are 1, and J21SIZEp=0  
- J2 Mismatch Alarm (A1J2TIMp) when J21COMp and J21AISEp are 1,  
and J21SIZEp=0  
- TC Unequipped Alarm (A1TCUQp) when TC1ENp and TC1AENp are 1  
- TC Loss Of Lock Alarm (A1TCLLp) when TC1ENp and TC1AENp are 1  
- TC Mismatch Alarm (A1TCTMp) when TC1ENp and TC1AENp are 1  
- TC Loss Of Multiframe Alarm (A1TCLMp) when TC1ENp and TC1AENp  
are 1  
- TC AIS Detected (A1TCAISp) when TC1ENp and TC1AENp are 1.  
- or when R1SELp is a 1 and any of:  
- Loss of pointer detected (B1LOPp)  
- VT AIS detected (B1AISp)  
- B Drop Bus Loss Of Clock (BDLOCp)  
- B Drop Bus Upstream AIS detected (BsUAISIp) and HEAISEp is 1.  
- or when R1SELp is 1 and RAISEp is 1 (drop VT from B side) and any of:  
- B Drop H4 Error (BsDH4Ep) when DV1SELp is 0  
- Unequipped signal label (B1UNEQp) and UQAEp is 1  
- Mismatch signal label (B1SLERp)  
- J2 Loss Of Lock Alarm (B1J2LOLp) when J21COMp and J21AISEp are 1,  
and J21SIZEp=0.  
- J2 Mismatch Alarm (B1J2TIMp) when J21COMp and J21AISEp are 1,  
and J21SIZEp=0  
- TC Unequipped Alarm (B1TCUQp) when TC1ENp and TC1AENp are 1  
- TC Loss Of Lock Alarm (B1TCLLp) when TC1ENp and TC1AENp are 1  
- TC Mismatch Alarm (B1TCTMp) when TC1ENp and TC1AENp are 1  
- TC Loss Of Multiframe Alarm (B1TCLMp) when TC1ENp and TC1AENp  
are 1  
- TC AIS Detected (B1TCAISp) when TC1ENp and TC1AENp are 1.  
- or when Receive FIFO Error (R1FFEp) and RAISEp are 1.  
- or when a 1 is written to send receive AIS (R1AISp).  
- or when RTUN1p is invalid.  
The AIS will be sent for one multiframe when a receive FIFO error  
occurs. The s in AsUAISIp, BsUAISIp, AsDH4Ep and BsDH4Ep repre-  
sents the STS-1 or TUG in which the TU/VT has been selected, where s  
= 1-3 or A-C.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 103 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Receive E1 Line Clock Inversion:  
011  
0
RCLKIp  
A common control for the four ports.  
(cont.)  
A 0 enables the E1 receive data signal to be clocked out on positive (ris-  
ing) RCOpn clock edges. A 1 causes E1 data to be clocked out on nega-  
tive (falling) RCOpn clock edges.  
Add Indicator Inversion:  
A 1 causes the A and B Add bus output indi-  
cator signals (AADDp and BADDp) to be active high instead of active low  
when a time slot is added to the bus.  
012  
7
6
ADDIp  
APEp  
A/B Add Bus Even Parity Generated:  
A 1 enables even parity to be  
generated, while a 0 enables odd parity to be generated. Parity is calcu-  
lated over the data byte only.  
Interrupt/Event Positive/Negative Alarm Transition Selection:  
An  
5
4
IPOSp  
INEGp  
event register bit will latch, and a software interrupt indication will occur,  
according to the transitions of any alarm given in the table below. The  
corresponding interrupt mask bit must be set if an interrupt is required. A  
hardware interrupt occurs when the hardware interrupt bit is also  
enabled (control bit HDWIEp is 1). These bits are disabled when a 0 is  
written to control bit LATENp.  
IPOSp INEGp  
Event Latches and Interrupt Occurs:  
not on any alarm transition  
on positive alarm transition (0 to 1)  
on negative alarm transition (1 to 0)  
on both positive and negative alarm transitions  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
RFI Enable:  
A common control bit for all four ports. A 1 enables an RFI  
indication to cause an interrupt. A 0 disables an RFI indication (bit 4 in  
V5 of the TU/VT) from causing an interrupt.  
3
2
1
RFIEp  
THRSBYp  
DPEp  
Threshold Modulation Disabled:  
A 1 disables the threshold modula-  
tion capability in each of the four modulation circuits. A 0 enables thresh-  
old modulation capability in each of the four modulation circuits.  
A/B Drop Bus Even Parity Detected:  
This bit works in conjunction with  
the PDDOp control bit to determine the parity calculation in the drop  
direction.  
DPEp  
0
PDDOp  
0
Action (for both A and B buses)  
Odd parity check over drop data, SPE, and  
C1J1V1.  
0
1
1
0
Odd parity check over drop data only.  
Even parity check over drop data, SPE, and  
C1J1V1.  
1
1
Even parity check over drop data only.  
Other than reporting the event, no action is taken upon parity error indi-  
cation.  
A/B Drop Bus Parity Detected on Data Only:  
Common control bit for  
0
PDDOp  
both buses. A 1 causes parity to be calculated over the data byte only. A  
0 causes parity to be calculated over the data byte, SPE and C1J1V1  
signals. Please refer to the table provided for DPEp.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 104 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
A/B H1/H2 or E1 Byte AIS Enable:  
013  
7
HEAISEp  
Common control for both the A and  
B Drop buses. A 1 enables an AIS detected in either the SDH/SONET  
H1/H2 bytes, or in the E1 bytes, to generate a receive E1 line AIS and  
transmit an RDI (when enabled).  
Drop Bus V1 Select:  
Common control bit for both buses. A 0 selects the  
6
5
DV1SELp  
DV1REFp  
H4 byte to be used as the multiframe indicator. The V1 pulse, if present  
in the drop bus C1J1V1 signal, is ignored. A 1 selects the V1 pulses  
present in the A and B Drop bus C1J1V1 signals to be used for multi-  
frame alignment. The H4 multiframe detector is disabled. Please refer to  
the table provided for control bit DV1REFp.  
Drop Bus V1 Reference Enable:  
Common control bit for both buses.  
Enabled when add bus timing is selected. In drop bus timing mode this  
bit must be set to zero. In add bus timing mode this control bit works in  
conjunction with the DV1SELp control bit according to the following table:  
DV1SELp  
0
DV1REFp  
0
Action  
Drop side uses H4 multiframe detector to  
determine V1 pulse  
Add side uses V1 pulse from add bus  
C1J1V1 signal  
0
1
1
1
0
1
Drop side uses H4 multiframe detector to  
determine V1 pulse  
Add side uses V1 pulse from drop side H4  
multiframe detector  
Drop side uses V1 pulse from drop bus  
C1J1V1 signal  
Add side uses V1 pulse from add side  
C1J1V1 signal  
Drop side uses V1 pulse from drop side  
C1J1V1 signal  
Add side uses V1 pulse from drop side  
C1J1V1 signal  
Transmit Remote Defect Indication Enable:  
Common control for both  
4
RDIENp  
buses. This control bit enables incoming receive side (Drop) alarms to  
generate a Remote Defect Indication in the transmit (Add) direction. This  
bit also works in conjunction with the control bit 1BnRDIp found in the  
Operations (Control) Registers (048H, 078H, 0A8H, 0D8H).  
More details of how these control bits function can be found in the Oper-  
ation Section on Remote Defect Indications.  
Force the NPI Column Unused Bytes to Zero:  
A 1 forces to 00H the  
3
2
NULLZp  
DDINDp  
unused bytes in the column following the NPI bytes when the NPI fea-  
ture is enabled for the same TUG-3 (NPIAp, NPIBp or NPICp is a 1). A 0  
forces the unused bytes following the NPI to a high impedance state on  
the A/B buses.  
Delay Drop Bus Indication Signal:  
A 1 increases the delay of the drop  
bus indication signals (ADINDp and BDINDp) by one clock cycle.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 105 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Unequipped Alarm AIS/RDI/TC Alarm Enable:  
013  
1
UQAEp  
A common control for  
(cont.)  
both the A and B Drop buses. A 1 enables a receive E1 line AIS, an RDI  
and both of the TC alarms (TCnODIp, TCnRDIp) to be transmitted when  
an unequipped alarm is detected in either the A or B Drop bus signals.  
Transmit O-Bit Channel With Zeros:  
A common control for all four  
0
TOBWZp  
ports. A 0 enables the microprocessor-written values for the O-bit chan-  
nel and the unused bits in the K4 (Z7) byte to be transmitted. A 1 forces  
the O-bit channel and the unused bits in the K4 (Z7) byte to be transmit-  
ted as zero for all four ports.  
COMMON REGISTERS - PROVISIONING DESCRIPTIONS (p=1-4)  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Unused:  
014  
7-5  
4
Unused(p)  
UEAMEp  
These bits must be written to 0.  
Unequipped Active Multiplex Line Enable:  
A 0 enables an  
unequipped channel or an unequipped supervisory channel to be gener-  
ated in the Multiplexer Mode only, according to the table given below:  
Drop  
A
Add  
B
Action  
Unequipped or unequipped supervisory channel  
can be transmitted for the TU/VT selected on the A  
Bus.  
B
A
Unequipped or unequipped supervisory channel  
can be transmitted for the TU/VT selected on the B  
Bus.  
A 1 enables an unequipped channel or unequipped supervisory channel  
to be transmitted on the active bus for the TU/VT selected. All other  
modes (Unidirectional Ring Mode and Bidirectional Ring Mode) always  
transmit an unequipped channel or an unequipped supervisory channel  
on the active bus only.  
See control bits UCHnEp and USCHnEp below (Addresses 04A, 07A,  
0AA, 0DA) for associated control functions.  
Select E1AIS:  
A 1 disables the TOH H1/H2n AIS detection circuit and  
3
SE1AISp  
enables the AIS detection circuit for the TOH E1n bytes. A 0 enables the  
AIS detection circuit for the H1/H2n bytes and disables that for the E1n  
bytes. Here the value of n is 1 for an STM-1 format and 1, 2 or 3 for an  
AU-3/STS-1 signal.  
V5 Alarm Detection Select 10:  
A 1 selects 10 consecutive RDI asser-  
tions for detection and recovery. A 0 selects 5 consecutive RDI asser-  
tions for detection and recovery.  
2
1
V5AL10p  
PTALTEp  
Pointer Tracking AIS to LOP Transition Enabled:  
A 1 enables the AIS  
to LOP transition in the pointer tracking state machine, as required by  
ETSI standards. A 0 will disable the transition, as required by Bellcore  
and ANSI standards.  
Hardware Interrupt Enable:  
A 1 enables the interrupt lead to be acti-  
0
HDWIEp  
vated when an interrupt occurs.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 106 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
A 1 clears to zero all controls, alarms, internal counters and per-  
Reset:  
015  
7
RESETp  
formance counters, sets control bits AAHZEp and BAHZEp to 1, and re-  
initializes the receive and transmit FIFOs. This bit is self-clearing, and  
will reset to 0 after the reset cycle is completed. See Note 1.  
Reset A Side Bus Alarms:  
A 1 clears the alarms associated with the A  
side bus and the LEXTCp alarm. This bit is self-clearing, and will reset to  
0 after the reset cycle is completed. See Note 2.  
6
5
4
RESTABp  
RESTBBp  
RESTSPp  
Reset B Side Bus Alarms:  
A 1 clears the alarms associated with the B  
side bus and SPOT alarms. This bit is self-clearing, and will reset to 0  
after the reset cycle is completed. See Note 2.  
Reset Internal Processor (SPOT):  
A 1 resets the SPOT processor,  
without affecting its RAM. This bit will reset itself to 0 after the reset cycle  
is completed. See Note 1.  
Unused:  
3-1  
0
Unused(p)  
INITSPp  
These bits must be written to 0.  
Initialize Internal Processor (SPOT) Data RAM:  
A 1 initializes the Data  
RAM associated with the SPOT processor and resets the general pur-  
pose registers of this processor. This bit should only be set to 1 after a  
hardware reset (lead B4) or a software reset (control bit RESETp above)  
has been activated. This bit is self-clearing and will reset to 0 after the  
Data RAM initialization is complete. See Note 1.  
Unused:  
0F1  
0F5  
7-4  
3
Unused(p)  
V4ENp  
These bits must be written to 0.  
V4 Enable:  
A 1 enables the V4 access function in both receive and  
transmit directions.  
Unused:  
2-0  
7
Unused(p)  
TxB2DISp  
These bits must be written to 0.  
Transmit BIP-2 Disable (Test Bit):  
A 0 is used for normal operation and  
will allow the calculated N2 (Z6) BIP-2 and V5 BIP-2 values to be trans-  
mitted. A 1 will disable N2 (Z6) BIP-2 calculation as well as V5 BIP-2 cal-  
culation for all 4 ports and output zeros in its place.  
Unused:  
These bits must be written to 0.  
6-0  
Unused(p)  
Note 1: The control bits RESETp, RESTSPp and INITSPp in address 015H should not be applied simultaneously, but only  
serially (e.g., 80H followed by 01H, rather than 81H).  
Note 2: Control bits RESTABp and RESTBBp may be applied at the same time (60H).  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 107 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
COMMON REGISTERS - INTERRUPT INDICATION REGISTER DESCRIPTIONS (p=1-4)  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Software Interrupt Indication:  
A 1 indicates that one or more latched  
020  
7
INTp  
alarm(s) has occurred for which the corresponding interrupt mask bit(s)  
is/are set to 1.  
External Clock Interrupt Indication:  
Enabled when a 1 is written into  
the ECKMSKp bit. A 1 indicates that the external clock at input lead  
EXTCK has failed (i.e., LEXTCp=1).  
6
5
4
3
EXTCKp  
ASIDEp  
BSIDEp  
PORT4p  
A Side Interrupt Indication:  
Enabled when a 1 is written into the  
ASMSKp bit. A 1 indicates that an alarm has occurred in one of the  
A-side alarm registers (i.e., 022H and 024H, bits 2, 1 and 0).  
B Side Interrupt Indication:  
Enabled when a 1 is written into the  
BSMSKp bit. A 1 indicates that an alarm has occurred in one of the  
B-side alarm registers (i.e., 026H and 028H, bits 2, 1 and 0).  
Port 4 Interrupt Indication:  
Enabled when a 1 is written into the  
P4MSKp bit. A 1 indicates that an alarm has occurred in one of the port  
4 alarm registers for which the corresponding additional interrupt mask  
bit is also set to 1 (addresses 017H, 018H and 019H).  
Port 3 Interrupt Indication:  
Enabled when a 1 is written into the  
2
1
0
PORT3p  
PORT2p  
PORT1p  
P3MSKp bit. A 1 indicates that an alarm has occurred in one of the port  
3 alarm registers for which the corresponding additional interrupt mask  
bit is also set to 1 (addresses 017H, 018H and 019H).  
Port 2 Interrupt Indication:  
Enabled when a 1 is written into the  
P2MSKp bit. A 1 indicates that an alarm has occurred in one of the port  
2 alarm registers for which the corresponding additional interrupt mask  
bit is also set to 1 (addresses 017H, 018H and 019H).  
Port 1 Interrupt Indication:  
Enabled when a 1 is written into the  
P1MSKp bit. A 1 indicates that an alarm has occurred in one of the port  
1 alarm registers for which the corresponding additional interrupt mask  
bit is also set to 1 (addresses 017H, 018H and 019H).  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 108 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
COMMON REGISTERS - INTERRUPT MASK DESCRIPTIONS (p=1-4)  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Unused  
016  
7-1  
0
Unused(p)  
SPTMSKp  
: These bits must be written to 0.  
SPOT Status Interrupt Mask:  
A 1 enables a hardware interrupt (lead  
INTp/IRQp) and a software interrupt indication (INTp) when a SPOT  
alarm has occurred in any of the SPOT alarm register bits (address  
028H, bits 7, 6 and 4). A 0 disables the SPOT alarms from causing an  
interrupt. See Note 1.  
Receive A Side Status Interrupt Mask Bit:  
A 1 enables a hardware  
017  
018  
019  
7, 5,  
3, 1  
RPTnAp  
(n=4-1)  
interrupt (lead INTp/IRQp) and software interrupt indication (INTp) when  
an alarm has occurred in an A-side port n alarm register while PnMSKp  
is set for port n. A 0 disables the A side receive alarms for port n from  
causing an interrupt. See Note 1.  
Receive B Side Status Interrupt Mask Bit  
: A 1 enables a hardware  
6, 4,  
2, 0  
RPTnBp  
(n=4-1)  
interrupt (lead INTp/IRQp) and software interrupt indication (INTp) when  
an alarm has occurred in a B-side port n alarm register while PnMSKp is  
set for port n. A 0 disables the B side receive alarms for port n from  
.
causing an interrupt See Note 1.  
Transmit FIFO Error A Side Status Interrupt Mask Bit  
: A 1 enables a  
7, 5,  
3, 1  
TFIFOnAp  
(n=4-1)  
hardware interrupt (lead INTp/IRQp) and software interrupt indication  
(INTp) when an alarm has occurred for an A-side port n transmit FIFO  
while PnMSKp is set for port n. A 0 disables a transmit FIFO error A side  
alarm for port n from causing an interrupt. See Note 1.  
Transmit FIFO Error B Side Status Interrupt Mask Bit  
: A 1 enables a  
6, 4,  
2, 0  
TFIFOnBp  
(n=4-1)  
hardware interrupt (lead INTp/IRQp) and software interrupt indication  
(INTp) when an alarm has occurred for a B-side port n transmit FIFO  
while PnMSKp is set for port n. A 0 disables a transmit FIFO error B side  
alarm for port n from causing an interrupt. See Note 1.  
Transmit Status Interrupt Mask Bit  
: A 1 enables a hardware interrupt  
7, 6,  
5, 4  
TPORTnp  
(n=4-1)  
(lead INTp/IRQp) and software interrupt indication (INTp) when an alarm  
has occurred for one of the port n transmit alarms while PnMSKp is set  
for port n. A 0 disables a transmit alarm from causing an interrupt. See  
Note 1.  
Receive FIFO Error Status Interrupt Mask Bit  
: A 1 enables a hardware  
3, 2,  
1, 0  
RFIFOnp  
(n=4-1)  
interrupt (lead INTp/IRQp) and software interrupt indication (INTp) when  
an alarm has occurred for a port n receive FIFO while PnMSKp is set for  
port n. A 0 disables a receive FIFO error alarm for port n from causing an  
interrupt. See Note 1.  
Note 1: Please refer to the tables in the Operation - Interrupt Structure section for the specific alarms and register loca-  
tions to which these interrupt masks apply. RPTnAp or RPTnBp are not required to be set to 1 to enable an  
interrupt for AnRFIp or BnRFIp alarms. Control bit HDWIEp must be set to 1 if a hardware interrupt is required.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 109 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
This bit must be written to 0.  
External Clock Interrupt Mask Bit:  
Unused:  
021  
7
6
Unused(p)  
ECKMSKp  
A 1 enables a hardware interrupt  
(lead INTp/IRQp) and software interrupt indications (INTp and EXTCKp)  
when an external clock failure alarm has occurred. See Note 1.  
A Side Interrupt Mask Bit  
(ASIDEp). See Note 1.  
5
4
3
ASMSKp  
BSMSKp  
P4MSKp  
: A 1 enables the A Side Interrupt Indication  
A 1 enables the B Side Interrupt Indication  
: A 1 enables the Port 4 Interrupt Indication  
B Side Interrupt Mask Bit:  
(BSIDEp). See Note 1.  
Port 4 Interrupt Mask Bit  
(PORT4p). It permits a hardware interrupt (lead INTp/IRQp) and a soft-  
ware interrupt indication (INTp) when an alarm has occurred in one of  
the alarm registers for port 4, when the corresponding RPT4A, RPT4B,  
TFIFO4A, TFIFO4B, RFIFO4 or TPORT4 mask bit is set to 1. See Note  
1.  
Port 3 Interrupt Mask Bit  
: A 1 enables the Port 3 Interrupt Indication  
2
1
0
P3MSKp  
P2MSKp  
P1MSKp  
(PORT3p). It permits a hardware interrupt (lead INTp/IRQp) and a soft-  
ware interrupt indication (INTp) when an alarm has occurred in one of  
the alarm registers for port 3, when the corresponding RPT3A, RPT3B,  
TFIFO3A, TFIFO3B, RFIFO3 or TPORT3 mask bit is set to 1. See Note  
1.  
Port 2 Interrupt Mask Bit  
: A 1 enables the Port 2 Interrupt Indication  
(PORT2p). It permits a hardware interrupt (lead INTp/IRQp) and a soft-  
ware interrupt indication (INTp) when an alarm has occurred in one of  
the alarm registers for port 2, when the corresponding RPT2A, RPT2B,  
TFIFO2A, TFIFO2B, RFIFO2 or TPORT2 mask bit is set to 1. See Note  
1.  
Port 1 Interrupt Mask Bit  
: A 1 enables the Port 1 Interrupt Indication  
(PORT1p). It permits a hardware interrupt (lead INTp/IRQp) and a soft-  
ware interrupt indication (INTp) when an alarm has occurred in one of  
the alarm registers for port 1, when the corresponding RPT1A, RPT1B,  
TFIFO1A, TFIFO1B, RFIFO1 or TPORT1 mask bit is set to 1. See Note  
1.  
Note 1: Please refer to the tables in the Operation - Interrupt Structure section for the specific alarms and register loca-  
tions to which these interrupt masks apply. RPTnAp or RPTnBp is not required to be set to 1 to enable an inter-  
rupt for AnRFIp or BnRFIp alarms. Control bit HDWIEp must be set to 1 if a hardware interrupt is required.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 110 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
A/B DROP AND ADD BUS - STATUS REGISTER DESCRIPTIONS (p=1-4)  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Same bit definitions as in register 023H, except the bits are latched.  
A Drop Bus Loss Of Clock:  
022  
023  
7-0  
7
ADLOCp  
A 1 indicates that the A Drop bus has  
detected a loss of clock. An alarm occurs when the input drop clock is  
stuck high or low for 1000 ns ± 500 ns. Recovery to 0 occurs on the first  
clock transition. Please note that an alarm will force the add bus data  
and parity bits to a high impedance state, and will set the add indicator  
off for the duration of the alarm, when the drop bus timing mode is  
selected.  
A Add Bus Loss Of Clock:  
A 1 indicates that the A Add bus has  
6
5
AALOCp  
ADPARp  
detected a loss of clock, when add bus timing is selected. A loss of clock  
alarm forces the add bus data and parity bit to a high impedance state,  
and sets the add indicator off for the duration of the alarm. An alarm  
occurs when the input add clock is stuck high or low for 1000 ns ± 500  
ns. Recovery to 0 occurs on the first clock transition.  
A Drop Bus Parity Error Detected:  
A 1 indicates that an even or odd  
parity error has been detected in the A Drop bus signals. Other than an  
alarm indication, no action is taken. Parity is monitored for each drop bus  
clock cycle.  
Unused:  
These bits read out as 0.  
4-3  
2
Unused(p)  
A3UAISIp  
A Side Received Upstream AIS Indication - AU-3 C/STS-1 No. 3:  
When control bit SE1AISp is 0, a 1 indicates that AIS has been detected  
in the H1/H2 bytes for AU-3 C/STS-1 No. 3. When control bit SE1AISp is  
1, a 1 indicates that AIS has been detected in the E13 byte for AU-3 C/  
STS-1 No. 3. Disabled when the format is an AU-4 VC-4, or STS-1.  
A Side Received Upstream AIS Indication - AU-3 B/STS-1 No. 2:  
When control bit SE1AISp is 0, a 1 indicates that AIS has been detected  
in the H1/H2 bytes for AU-3 B/STS-1 No. 2. When control bit SE1AISp is  
1, a 1 indicates that AIS has been detected in the E12 byte for AU-3 B/  
STS-1 No. 2. Disabled when the format is an AU-4 VC-4, or STS-1.  
1
0
A2UAISIp  
A1UAISIp  
A Side Received Upstream AIS Indication - AU-3 A/STS-1 No. 1,  
AU-4 VC-4, or STS-1:  
When control bit SE1AISp is 0, a 1 indicates that  
AIS has been detected in the H1/H2 bytes for AU-3 A/STS-1 No. 1, or in  
the AU-4 VC-4 signal. When control bit SE1AISp is 1, a 1 indicates that  
AIS has been detected in the E11 byte for AU-3 A/STS-1 No. 1, AU-4  
VC-4, or the STS-1 signal.  
024  
7-0  
Same bit definitions as in register 025H, except the bits are latched.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 111 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
A 1 indicates an external loss of clock alarm  
Loss Of External Clock:  
025  
7
LEXTCp  
when the external clock input EXTCK (lead C13) is stuck high or low for  
1000 ns ± 500 ns. Recovery to 0 occurs on the first clock transition.  
Unused:  
6-3  
2
Unused(p)  
A3DH4Ep  
These bits read out as 0.  
A Drop Bus Loss of H4 Indication - AU-3 C/STS-1 No. 3:  
Loss of mul-  
tiframe for AU-3 C/STS-1 No. 3 is declared if one or more H4 values dif-  
fer from those of a two-bit counter once per multiframe for two  
consecutive multiframes, when control bit DV1SELp is 0. The received  
H4 multiframe sequence is 00, 01, 10, and 11. The multiframe detector  
will continue to operate in a free running mode, but will lock to a new H4  
sequence after one multiframe sequence has been received correctly.  
This H4 detector is disabled when the format is an AU-4 VC-4, or STS-1.  
This bit is forced to 1 at power-up.  
A Drop Bus Loss of H4 Indication - AU-3 B/STS-1 No. 2:  
Loss of mul-  
1
A2DH4Ep  
tiframe for AU-3 B/STS-1 No. 2 is declared if one or more H4 values dif-  
fer from those of a two-bit counter once per multiframe for two  
consecutive multiframes, when control bit DV1SELp is 0. The received  
H4 multiframe sequence is 00, 01, 10, and 11. The multiframe detector  
will continue to operate in a free running mode, but will lock to a new H4  
sequence after one multiframe sequence has been received correctly.  
This H4 detector is disabled when the format is an AU-4 VC-4, or STS-1.  
This bit is forced to 1 at power-up.  
A Drop Bus Loss of H4 Indication - AU-3 A/STS-1 No. 1, AU-4 VC-4,  
0
A1DH4Ep  
or STS-1:  
Loss of multiframe for AU-3 A/STS-1 No. 1, AU-4 VC-4 or  
STS-1 is declared if one or more H4 values differ from those of a two-bit  
counter once per multiframe for two consecutive multiframes, when con-  
trol bit DV1SELp is 0. The received H4 multiframe sequence is 00, 01,  
10, and 11. The multiframe detector will continue to operate in a free run-  
ning mode, but will lock to a new H4 sequence after one multiframe  
sequence has been received correctly. This bit is forced to 1 at power-up.  
026  
7-0  
Same bit definitions as in register 027H, except the bits are latched.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 112 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
B Drop Bus Loss Of Clock:  
A 1 indicates that the B Drop bus has  
027  
7
BDLOCp  
detected a loss of clock. An alarm occurs when the input drop clock is  
stuck high or low for 1000 ns ± 500 ns. Recovery to 0 occurs on the first  
clock transition. Please note that an alarm will force the add bus data  
and parity bits to a high impedance state, and will set the add indicator  
off for the duration of the alarm, when the drop bus timing mode is  
selected.  
B Add Bus Loss Of Clock:  
A 1 indicates that the B Add bus has  
6
5
BALOCp  
BDPARp  
detected a loss of clock, when add bus timing is selected. A loss of clock  
alarm forces the add bus data and parity bit to a high impedance state,  
and sets the add indicator off for the duration of the alarm. An alarm  
occurs when the input drop clock is stuck high or low for 1000 ns ± 500  
ns. Recovery to 0 occurs on the first clock transition.  
B Drop Bus Parity Error Detected:  
A 1 indicates that an even or odd  
parity error has been detected in the B Drop bus signals. Other than an  
alarm indication, no action is taken. Parity is monitored for each drop bus  
clock cycle.  
Unused:  
These bits read out as 0.  
4-3  
2
Unused(p)  
B3UAISIp  
B Side Received Upstream AIS Indication - AU-3 C/STS-1 No. 3:  
When control bit SE1AISp is 0, a 1 indicates that AIS has been detected  
in the H1/H2 bytes for AU-3 C/STS-1 No. 3. When control bit SE1AISp is  
1, a 1 indicates that AIS has been detected in the E13 byte for AU-3 C/  
STS-1 No. 3. Disabled when the format is a AU-4 VC-4, or STS-1.  
B Side Received Upstream AIS Indication - AU-3 B/STS-1 No. 2:  
When control bit SE1AISp is 0, a 1 indicates that AIS has been detected  
in the H1/H2 bytes for AU-3 B/STS-1 No. 2. When control bit SE1AISp is  
1, a 1 indicates that AIS has been detected in the E12 byte for AU-3 B/  
STS-1 No. 2. Disabled when the format is a AU-4 VC-4, or STS-1  
1
0
B2UAISIp  
B1UAISIp  
B Side Received Upstream AIS Indication - AU-3 A/STS-1 No. 1,  
AU-4 VC-4, or STS-1:  
When control bit SE1AISp is 0, a 1 indicates that  
AIS has been detected in the H1/H2 bytes for AU-3 A/STS-1 No. 1, or in  
the AU-4 VC-4 signal. When control bit SE1AISp is 1, a 1 indicates that  
AIS has been detected in the E11 byte for AU-3 A/STS-1 No. 1, AU-4  
VC-4, or the STS-1 signal.  
028  
7-0  
Same bit definitions as in register 029H, except the bits are latched.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 113 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Internal Processor (SPOT) Loss of Clock:  
029  
7
SPTLOCp  
The 29.16 MHz clock inter-  
nally derived from the 58.32 MHz desynchronizer clock input (EXTCK) is  
monitored for loss of clock. Loss of clock is declared and this bit is set to  
1 if this clock is stuck high or low for 1000 ± 500 ns. Recovery to 0 occurs  
on the first clock transition.  
Watch Dog Timer Expired:  
6
WDTEXPp  
This bit is set to 1 when the SPOT is unable  
to service all requests in a timely manner.  
Unused:  
5
4
Unused(p)  
PERRp  
This bits reads out as 0.  
Parity Error:  
This bit is set to 1 when a parity error is detected while  
reading the Instruction RAM of the SPOT.  
Unused:  
3
2
Unused(p)  
B3DH4Ep  
This bits reads out as 0.  
B Drop Bus Loss of H4 Indication - AU-3 C/STS-1 No. 3:  
Loss of mul-  
tiframe for AU-3 C/STS-1 No. 3 is declared if one or more H4 values dif-  
fer from those of a two-bit counter once per multiframe for two  
consecutive multiframes, when control bit DV1SELp is 0. The received  
H4 multiframe sequence is 00, 01, 10, and 11. The multiframe detector  
will continue to operate in a free running mode, but will lock to a new H4  
sequence after one multiframe sequence has been received correctly.  
This H4 detector is disabled when the format is an AU-4 VC-4, or STS-1.  
This bit is forced to 1 at power-up.  
B Drop Bus Loss of H4 Indication - AU-3 B/STS-1 No. 2:  
Loss of mul-  
1
B2DH4Ep  
tiframe for AU-3 B/STS-1 No. 2 is declared if one or more H4 values dif-  
fer from those of a two-bit counter once per multiframe for two  
consecutive multiframes, when control bit DV1SELp is 0. The received  
H4 multiframe sequence is 00, 01, 10, and 11. The multiframe detector  
will continue to operate in a free running mode, but will lock to a new H4  
sequence after one multiframe sequence has been received correctly.  
This H4 detector is disabled when the format is an AU-4 VC-4, or STS-1.  
This bit is forced to 1 at power-up.  
B Drop Bus Loss of H4 Indication - AU-3 A/STS-1 No. 1, AU-4 VC-4,  
0
B1DH4Ep  
or STS-1:  
Loss of multiframe for AU-3 A/STS-1 No. 1, AU-4 VC-4 or  
STS-1 is declared if one or more H4 values differ from those of a two-bit  
counter once per multiframe for two consecutive multiframes, when con-  
trol bit DV1SELp is 0. The received H4 multiframe sequence is 00, 01,  
10, and 11. The multiframe detector will continue to operate in a free run-  
ning mode, but will lock to a new H4 sequence after one multiframe  
sequence has been received correctly. This bit is forced to 1 at power-up.  
PORT n - DESYNCHRONIZER CONTROL REGISTER DESCRIPTIONS (p=1-4)  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Desynchronizer Pointer Leak Rate Register - Port n:  
The count writ-  
049 Port 1  
079 Port 2  
0A9 Port 3  
0D9 Port 4  
7-0  
Pointer  
Leak  
Rate  
ten into this location is used for the internal leak rate buffer, and repre-  
sents the average leak rate. A count of one represents 8 frames, or 2  
multiframes, in the rate of occurrence of pointer movements from the  
number of counts read from the positive and negative stuff counters.  
Value(p)  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 114 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
PORT n - PROVISIONING REGISTER DESCRIPTIONS (p=1-4)  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Transmit Port n A/B Drop/Add Bus Selection:  
TnSEL0p selection criteria for the eight available modes of operation of port n:  
RnSELp  
04A Port 1  
07A Port 2  
0AA Port 3  
0DA Port 4  
7
6
5
TnSEL1p  
The table below lists the  
TnSEL1p TnSEL0p RnSELp Operating Mode  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
A Drop only (Drop)  
B Drop only (Drop)  
A Drop A Add (Single Unidirectional Ring)  
B Drop B Add (Single Unidirectional Ring)  
A Drop B Add (Multiplexer)  
B Drop A Add (Multiplexer)  
A Drop A and B Add (Dual Unidirectional  
Ring)  
1
1
1
B Drop B and A Add (Dual Unidirectional  
Ring)  
Unequipped Channel for Port n Enabled:  
The UCHnEp control bit works in  
4
UCHnEp  
conjunction with the USCHnEp control bit (in bit position 3) according to the  
following table:  
UCHnEp USCHnEp  
Action  
0
1
X
0
Normal Operation.  
Unequipped TU/VT generated. An unequipped  
TU/VT consists of a normal NDF, size bits equal  
to 10, a fixed pointer equal to 105, and all other bytes  
equal to 00H.  
1
1
Unequipped supervisory TU/VT generated. An  
unequipped supervisory TU/VT consists of a normal  
NDF, size bits equal to 10, a fixed pointer equal to  
105, and a valid J2 byte. The V5 byte will consist of a  
valid BIP-2, with the signal label sent as zeros by set-  
ting control bit TnTx Label to 0. The N2 (Z6) byte can  
be sent as zero by setting TCnENp=0 and  
TxB2DISp=1. The K4 (Z7) byte, bits 1, 2, 3, 4 and 8  
can be sent as zeros by setting control bit  
TOBWZp=1. The RDI bits, V5 bit 8 and K4 (Z7) bits 5,  
6 and 7 can be disabled and sent as zeros by setting  
control bit RDIENp=0.  
Note: X = don't care (0 or 1).  
See UEAMEp description in register 014H and the Operation section under  
E1Mx16 Unequipped Operation for further description.  
Unequipped Supervisory Channel for Port n Enabled:  
tion with the UCHnEp bit according to the table given above.  
3
2
USCHnEp  
BYPASnp  
Works in conjunc-  
Bypass Codec of Port n:  
A 1 disables the HDB3 Codec (coder and decoder)  
of port n for NRZ operation. A 0 enables the HDB3 Codec for rail operation.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 115 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
A 1 enables the receive data (NRZ or rail) output and  
clock output for port n when lead QUIETpn is low. A 0 forces the data and  
clock output leads to a high impedance state. The four bits power up as 0 and  
are reset to 0. A 1 must be written to these control bits to enable the port E1  
outputs.  
Receive Port n Enable:  
04A Port 1  
07A Port 2  
0AA Port 3  
0DA Port 4  
(cont.)  
1
RnENp  
Unused:  
0
7
Unused(p)  
ADnENp  
This bit must be written to 0.  
A Side Drop Bus Port n TU/VT Selection Output Enable:  
04B Port 1  
07B Port 2  
0AB Port 3  
0DB Port 4  
A 1 enables the  
drop bus ADINDp signal output. This signal will be active low for the time slots  
corresponding to the TU/VT selected for port n.  
B Side Drop Bus Port n TU/VT Selection Output Enable  
: A 1 enables the  
drop bus BDINDp signal output. This signal will be active low for the time slots  
corresponding to the TU/VT selected for port n.  
6
5
4
3
BDnENp  
AAnENp  
BAnENp  
ANAnTxp  
A Side Add Bus Port n TU/VT Selection Output Enable:  
A 1 enables the  
add bus AAINDp signal output. This signal will be active low for the time slots  
corresponding to the TU/VT selected for port n.  
B Side Add Bus Port n TU/VT Selection Output Enable:  
A 1 enables the  
add bus BAINDp signal output. This signal will be active low for the time slots  
corresponding to the TU/VT selected for port n.  
PRBS Analyzer Sampling Tx E1 Signal for Port n:  
A 1 enables the internal  
PRBS analyzer to sample the Tx E1 signal to be sent to the synchronizer. A 0  
enables the internal PRBS analyzer to sample the E1 signal to be sent to the  
Rx E1 ports.  
15  
PRBS Analyzer Enable for Port n:  
lyzer. A 0 disables the analyzer.  
2
1
0
ANAnENp  
PRBSnENp  
FRDISnp  
A1 enables the internal 2 -1 PRBS ana-  
15  
PRBS Generator Enable for Port n:  
generator. A 0 disables the generator.  
A 1 enables the internal 2 -1 PRBS  
FEBE and RDI Disabled For Port n:  
Enabled when the single unidirectional  
mode (control bits TnSEL1p, TnSEL0p are equal to 01) is selected. A 1 dis-  
ables receive side alarms or an out of range condition from generating an  
RDI. In addition, the REI (FEBE) value is transmitted as a zero.  
Unused:  
04C Port 1  
07C Port 2  
0AC Port 3  
0DC Port 4  
7
Unused(p)  
RTUNnp  
This bit must be written to 0.  
Receive TU/VT Selection for Port n:  
6-0  
The seven-bit binary code written into  
this location selects the TU/VT that is to be dropped from the A and/or B-side  
drop bus. Control bits TnSEL1p, TnSEL0p and RnSELp determine the drop  
bus(es) that the data is dropped from. If no TU/VT is selected, the micropro-  
cessor should either write a 1 to control bit RnAISp, thereby forcing an E1  
AIS, or should write a 0 to RnENp, which will tristate the port n data and clock  
output leads. Also, the FEBE and RDI values are transmitted as zero.  
Unused:  
04D Port 1  
07D Port 2  
0AD Port 3  
0DD Port 4  
7
Unused(np)  
TTUNnp  
This bit must be written to 0.  
Transmit TU/VT Selection for Port n:  
6-0  
The seven-bit binary code written into  
this location selects the TU/VT that is to be added to the A and/or B-side add  
bus. Control bits TnSEL1p, TnSEL0p and RnSELp determine the add bus(es)  
that the data is added to. If no TU/VT is selected, the A or B add bus will  
tristate.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 116 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
PORT n - RECEIVE STATUS REGISTER AND COUNTER DESCRIPTIONS (A SIDE) (p=1-4)  
The following descriptions pertain to the status registers and counters assigned to Port n. The status registers  
provide two readable bit positions per alarm. One bit (in an odd-numbered address) indicates the detected  
alarm as unlatched. The second bit (in the preceding even-numbered address) provides the alarm status as an  
latched alarm indication. A latched bit position is set on positive, negative, or both positive and negative transi-  
tions of the alarm, or on a positive level of the alarm. A latched alarm is cleared on a microprocessor read cycle  
of its address. During a read cycle for a counter, internal logic holds any increment to the counter until the read  
cycle is complete, and then updates the counter afterwards.  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
030 Port 1  
060 Port 2  
090 Port 3  
0C0 Port 4  
7-0  
Latched  
An  
Alarms(np)  
Same alarms as the unlatched indications in the following address loca-  
tions (7-0), except that these alarm states are latched.  
A Drop Bus Port n TU/VT AIS Alarm:  
been detected in the V1/V2 pointer bytes for the TU/VT selected.  
031 Port 1  
061 Port 2  
091 Port 3  
0C1 Port 4  
7
6
AnAISp  
A 1 indicates that an AIS has  
A Drop Bus Port n Loss Of TU/VT Pointer Alarm:  
loss of pointer has been detected in the V1/V2 pointer bytes for the TU/  
VT selected.  
AnLOPp  
A 1 indicates that a  
A Drop Bus Port n TU/VT Pointer Size Error Indication:  
A 1 indicates  
5
4
AnSIZEp  
AnNDFp  
that the receive size indicator in the pointer (Bits 5 and 6 in the V1  
pointer byte) is not 10 for the TU/VT selected. The detection and recov-  
ery time is immediate.  
A Drop Bus Port n New Data Flag Indication:  
A 1 indicates that a New  
Data Flag (1001 or 0001/1101/1011/1000) has been detected in the V1  
pointer byte for the TU/VT selected (i.e., bits 1-4 in the V1 byte are the  
inverse of the normal 0110 pattern or differ in only one bit, with a correct  
size indicator and a valid pointer value).  
A Drop Bus Port n Remote Server Defect Indication:  
A 1 indicates  
3
AnRDISp  
that either a remote server defect alarm has been detected (bits 5, 6 and  
7 in K4 (Z7) byte are equal to 101), or an RDI has been detected coming  
from older equipment (bit 8 in V5 byte equals 1 when bits 6 and 7 in K4  
(Z7) byte are equal to 00 or 11). The number of consecutive events used  
for detection and recovery is determined by control bit V5AL10p.  
A Drop Bus Port n Remote Failure Indication:  
A 1 indicates that bit 4  
in the V5 byte is equal to 1 for the TU/VT selected. The detection and  
recovery time is immediate.  
2
1
AnRFIp  
A Drop Bus Port n Unequipped Indication:  
AnUNEQp  
A 1 indicates that an  
Unequipped status has been detected in the V5 signal label (Bits 5-7 in  
V5 byte = 0) for the TU/VT selected in the A side drop bus. An  
unequipped signal label is equal to 000. Five or more consecutive  
received unequipped signal labels will cause this alarm. Recovery  
occurs when five or more consecutive signal labels are received not  
equal to 000.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 117 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
A Drop Bus Port n Signal Label Mismatch Indication:  
that the receive signal label (Bits 5-7 in V5 byte) does not match the  
microprocessor-written signal label in the TU/VT selected for the A side  
drop bus. Five or more consecutive signal label mismatches (against the  
microprocessor-written value), or received labels not equal to 001,  
results in an alarm. Recovery occurs upon receipt of five or more con-  
secutive correct signal labels, or 001 values.  
031 Port 1  
061 Port 2  
091 Port 3  
0C1 Port 4  
(cont.)  
0
AnSLERp  
A 1 indicates  
A Drop Bus Port n Positive Pointer Justification Counter:  
A four-bit  
032 Port 1  
062 Port 2  
092 Port 3  
0C2 Port 4  
7-4  
3-0  
7-0  
AnPJ  
Counter(p) counter that increments on a positive pointer movement for the TU/VT  
selected. The counter saturates at full count and is cleared when it is  
read.  
A Drop Bus Port n Negative Pointer Justification Counter:  
AnNJ  
A four-bit  
Counter(p) counter that increments on a negative pointer movement for the TU/VT  
selected. The counter saturates at full count and is cleared when it is  
read.  
A Drop Bus Port n BIP-2 Counter:  
An 8-bit counter which counts the  
033 Port 1  
063 Port 2  
093 Port 3  
0C3 Port 4  
AnBIP2  
Counter(p) number of BIP-2 errors detected for the TU/VT selected. A maximum of  
two errors can occur each frame. These two errors cause a single count  
if the BLOCKp control bit is set to 1. The counter saturates at full count  
and is cleared when it is read.  
A Drop Bus Port n FEBE Counter:  
An 8-bit counter which counts the  
034 Port 1  
064 Port 2  
094 Port 3  
0C4 Port 4  
7-0  
AnFEBE  
Counter(p) number of FEBE errors received (Bit 3 in V5 byte = 1) for the TU/VT  
selected. The counter saturates at full count and is cleared when it is  
read.  
Unused:  
035 Port 1  
065 Port 2  
095 Port 3  
0C5 Port 4  
7-3  
2-0  
Unused(np)  
These bits read out as indeterminate.  
A Drop Bus Port n Received Signal Label  
An Rx  
Label(p)  
: These three bit positions  
correspond to the three signal label bits in bits 5 through 7 of the V5 byte  
in the TU/VT selected. This location is updated every 500 microseconds.  
Bit 2 corresponds to bit 7 in the V5 byte. These bits are also compared  
against the microprocessor-written mismatch signal label bits for an  
unequipped and mismatch indication. Code 1 (001) has been imple-  
mented in hardware and does not have to be written into this location.  
04E Port 1  
07E Port 2  
0AE Port 3  
0DE Port 4  
7-6  
Latched  
An  
Alarms(p)  
Same alarms as the corresponding address 04F, 07F, 0AF, 0DF bit posi-  
tions, except that these alarms are latched.  
Unused:  
These bits read out as zero.  
5-4  
3-2  
Unused(np)  
Latched  
An  
Same alarms as the corresponding address 04F, 07F, 0AF, 0DF bit posi-  
tions, except that these alarms are latched.  
Alarms(p)  
Unused:  
These bits read out as zero.  
1-0  
Unused(np)  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 118 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
A Drop Bus Port n Remote Payload Defect Indication:  
that a remote payload defect alarm has been detected (bits 5, 6 and 7 in  
K4 (Z7) byte are equal to 010). The number of consecutive events used  
for detection and recovery is determined by control bit V5AL10p.  
04F Port 1  
07F Port 2  
0AF Port 3  
0DF Port 4  
7
AnRDIPp  
A 1 indicates  
A Drop Bus Port n Remote Connectivity Defect Indication:  
A 1 indi-  
6
AnRDICp  
cates that a remote connectivity defect alarm has been detected (bits 5,  
6 and 7 in K4 (Z7) byte are equal to 110). The number of consecutive  
events used for detection and recovery is determined by control bit  
V5AL10p.  
Unused:  
5-4  
3
Unused(np)  
AnJ2LOLp  
These bits read out as zero.  
A Drop Bus Port n J2 Loss Of Lock Alarm:  
Enabled when control bit  
J2nSIZEp is a 0, and control bit J2nCOMp is a 1. A 1 indication occurs  
when the alignment of the 16-byte J2 trace identifier label (message) has  
not been established.  
A Drop Bus Port n J2 Trail Trace Mismatch Alarm:  
Enabled when  
2
AnJ2TIMp  
control bit J2nSIZEp is a 0, and control bit J2nCOMp is a 1. A 1 indicates  
that the stable 16-byte message did not match for one message time.  
Recovery occurs when the J2 state machine loses lock and then  
acquires lock with a 16-byte stable J2 message that matches the J2  
comparison message written by the microprocessor.  
Unused:  
1-0  
7-0  
Unused(np)  
These bits read out as zero.  
A Drop Bus Port n Receive K4 (Z7) Byte  
: The eight bits in this register  
038 Port 1  
068 Port 2  
098 Port 3  
0C8 Port 4  
An  
Receive  
K4 (Z7)  
Byte(p)  
position correspond to the K4 (Z7) byte received in the TU/VT selected.  
Bit 7 corresponds to bit 1 in the K4 (Z7) byte.  
A Drop Bus Port n Receive O-bits  
: The two nibbles (bits 7-4 and 3-0) in  
039 Port 1  
069 Port 2  
099 Port 3  
0C9 Port 4  
7-0  
An  
Receive  
O-Bits(p)  
this register correspond to the two sets of four overhead communication  
bits received in the TU/VT selected. Bit 7 corresponds to bit 3 in the sec-  
ond justification control byte, while bit 0 corresponds to bit 6 in the first  
justification control byte. The two nibbles written into this register location  
will be from the same frame.  
05A Port 1  
08A Port 2  
0BA Port 3  
0EA Port 4  
7-1  
0
Latched  
An  
Alarms(p)  
Same alarms as the following address locations (7-1), except that these  
alarm states are latched.  
Unused:  
Unused(np)  
This bit reads out as indeterminate.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 119 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
A Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection Unequipped Alarm:  
A TC  
unequipped alarm indication (a 1) occurs when bits 3 through 8 in the N2  
(Z6) byte are all equal to 0 for 5 or more consecutive frames. Recovery to  
0 occurs when bits 3 through 8 are not all equal to 0 for 5 or more con-  
secutive frames.  
05B Port 1  
08B Port 2  
0BB Port 3  
0EB Port 4  
7
AnTCUQp  
A Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection AIS Alarm:  
A TC AIS alarm  
6
5
AnTCAISp  
AnTCLMp  
indication (a 1) occurs when bit 4 in the N2 (Z6) byte is equal to 1 for five  
or more consecutive frames. Recovery to 0 occurs when bit 4 is a 0 for  
five or more consecutive frames.  
A Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection Loss Of Multiframe Alarm:  
TC loss of multiframe alarm indication (a 1) occurs when four or more  
consecutive errored multiframes are detected in bits 7 and 8 in the N2  
(Z6) byte. Recovery to 0 occurs when three consecutive non-errored  
multiframes (1111 1111 1111 1110) are detected.  
A
A Drop Bus Port n Bus Tandem Connection Trail Trace Message  
4
3
AnTCLLp  
AnTCTMp  
Loss Of Lock Alarm:  
An alarm indication (a 1) occurs when the align-  
ment of the 16-byte N2 (Z6) Tandem Connection Trace identifier label  
(message) has not been established.  
A Drop Bus Port n Bus Tandem Connection Trail Trace Message  
Mismatch Alarm:  
An alarm indication (a 1) indicates that the stable Tan-  
dem Connection 16-byte message did not match for one message time.  
Recovery to 0 occurs when the N2 (Z6) byte TC message state machine  
loses lock and then acquires lock with a 16-byte stable N2 (Z6) byte  
message that matches the N2 (Z6) byte comparison message written by  
the microprocessor.  
A Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection ODI Alarm:  
A TC ODI alarm  
2
1
AnTCODIp  
AnTCRDIp  
Unused(np)  
indication (a 1) occurs when N2 (Z6) byte bit 7 in frame 74 is equal to 1  
for five or more consecutive frames. Recovery to 0 occurs when bit 7 is a  
0 for five or more consecutive frames.  
A Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection RDI Alarm:  
A TC RDI alarm  
indication (a 1) occurs when N2 (Z6) byte bit 8 in frame 73 is equal to 1  
for five or more consecutive frames. Recovery to 0 occurs when bit 8 is a  
0 for five or more consecutive frames.  
Unused:  
0
This bit reads out as indeterminate.  
A Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection BIP-2 Counter:  
An 8-bit  
100 Port 1  
200 Port 2  
300 Port 3  
400 Port 4  
7-0  
An TC  
BIP-2  
Error  
counter which counts the number of BIP-2 errors detected in the N2 (Z6)  
byte for the TU/VT selected when the tandem connection feature is  
Counter(p) enabled. A maximum of two errors can be counted each frame. These  
two errors cause a single count if the BLOCKp control bit is set to 1. The  
counter saturates at full count and is cleared when it is read.  
A Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection REI Counter:  
An 8-bit counter  
which counts the number of REI errors detected in bit 5 in the N2 (Z6)  
byte for the TU/VT selected when the tandem connection feature is  
101 Port 1  
201 Port 2  
301 Port 3  
401 Port 4  
7-0  
An TC  
REI  
Error  
Counter(p) enabled. The counter saturates at full count and is cleared when it is  
read.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 120 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
A Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection OEI Counter:  
which counts the number of OEI errors detected in bit 6 in the N2 (Z6)  
byte for the TU/VT selected when the tandem connection feature is  
102 Port 1  
202 Port 2  
302 Port 3  
402 Port 4  
7-0  
An TC  
OEI  
Error  
An 8-bit counter  
Counter(p) enabled. The counter saturates at full count and is cleared when it is  
read.  
A Drop Bus Port n Receive V4 Byte:  
When control bit V4ENp is 1, the  
eight bits in this register position correspond to the V4 byte received in  
the TU/VT selected. Bit 7 corresponds to bit 1 in the V4 byte.  
116 Port 1  
216 Port 2  
316 Port 3  
416 Port 4  
7-0  
An  
Receive  
V4  
Byte(p)  
PORT n - RECEIVE STATUS REGISTER AND COUNTER DESCRIPTIONS (B SIDE) (p=1-4)  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
03A Port 1  
06A Port 2  
09A Port 3  
0CA Port 4  
7-0  
Latched Bn Same alarms as the following address locations (7-0), except that these  
Alarms(p) alarm states are latched.  
B Drop Bus Port n TU/VT AIS Alarm:  
been detected in the V1/V2 pointer bytes for the TU/VT selected.  
03B Port 1  
06B Port 2  
09B Port 3  
0CB Port 4  
7
6
BnAISp  
A 1 indicates that an AIS has  
B Drop Bus Port n Loss Of TU/VT Pointer Alarm:  
loss of pointer has been detected in the V1/V2 pointer bytes for the TU/  
VT selected.  
BnLOPp  
A 1 indicates that a  
B Drop Bus Port n TU/VT Pointer Size Error Indication:  
A 1 indicates  
5
4
BnSIZEp  
BnNDFp  
that the receive size indicator in the pointer (Bits 5 and 6 in the V1  
pointer byte) is not 10 for the TU/VT selected. The detection and recov-  
ery time is immediate.  
B Drop Bus Port n New Data Flag Indication:  
A 1 indicates that a New  
Data Flag (1001 or 0001/1101/1011/1000) has been detected in the V1  
pointer byte for the TU/VT selected (i.e., bits 1-4 in the V1 byte are the  
inverse of the normal 0110 pattern or differ in only one bit, with a correct  
size indicator and a valid pointer value).  
B Drop Bus Port n Remote Server Defect Indication:  
A 1 indicates  
3
2
BnRDISp  
BnRFIp  
that either a remote server defect alarm has been detected (bits 5, 6 and  
7 in K4 (Z7) byte are equal to 101), or an RDI has been detected coming  
from older equipment (bit 8 in V5 byte equals 1 when bits 6 and 7 in K4  
(Z7) byte are equal to 00 or 11). The number of consecutive events used  
for detection and recovery is determined by control bit V5AL10p.  
B Drop Bus Port n Remote Failure Indication:  
A 1 indicates that bit 4  
in the V5 byte is equal to 1 for the TU/VT selected. The detection and  
recovery time is immediate.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 121 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
B Drop Bus Port n Unequipped Indication:  
A 1 indicates that an  
Unequipped status has been detected in the V5 signal label (Bits 5-7 in  
V5 byte = 0) for the TU/VT selected in the B side drop bus. An  
unequipped signal label is equal to 000. Five or more consecutive  
received unequipped signal labels will cause this alarm. Recovery  
occurs when five or more consecutive signal labels are received not  
equal to 000.  
03B Port 1  
06B Port 2  
09B Port 3  
0CB Port 4  
(cont.)  
1
BnUNEQp  
B Drop Bus Port n Signal Label Mismatch Indication:  
A 1 indicates  
0
BnSLERp  
that the receive signal label (Bits 5-7 in V5 byte) does not match the  
microprocessor-written signal label in the TU/VT selected for the B side  
drop bus. Five or more consecutive signal label mismatches (against the  
microprocessor-written value), or received labels not equal to 001,  
results in an alarm. Recovery occurs upon receipt of five or more con-  
secutive correct signal labels, or 001 values.  
B Drop Bus Port n Positive Pointer Justification Counter:  
A four-bit  
03C Port 1  
06C Port 2  
09C Port 3  
0CC Port 4  
7-4  
3-0  
7-0  
BnPJ  
Counter(p) counter that increments on a positive pointer movement for the TU/VT  
selected. The counter saturates at full count and is cleared when it is  
read.  
B Drop Bus Port n Negative Pointer Justification Counter:  
BnNJ  
A four-bit  
Counter(p) counter that increments on a negative pointer movement for the TU/VT  
selected. The counter saturates at full count and is cleared when it is  
read.  
B Drop Bus Port n BIP-2 Counter:  
An 8-bit counter which counts the  
03D Port 1  
06D Port 2  
09D Port 3  
0CD Port 4  
BnBIP2  
Counter(p) number of BIP-2 errors detected for the TU/VT selected. A maximum of  
two errors can occur each frame. These two errors cause a single count  
if the BLOCKp control bit is set to 1. The counter saturates at full count  
and is cleared when it is read.  
B Drop Bus Port n FEBE Counter:  
An 8-bit counter which counts the  
03E Port 1  
06E Port 2  
09E Port 3  
0CE Port 4  
7-0  
BnFEBE  
Counter(p) number of FEBE errors received (Bit 3 in V5 byte = 1) for the TU/VT  
selected. The counter saturates at full count and is cleared when it is  
read.  
Unused:  
03F Port 1  
06F Port 2  
09F Port 3  
0CF Port 4  
7-3  
2-0  
Unused(np)  
These bits read out as indeterminate.  
B Drop Bus Port n Received Signal Label:  
Bn RX  
Label(p)  
These three bit positions  
correspond to the three signal label bits located in bits 5 through 7 of the  
V5 byte for the TU/VT selected. This location is updated every 500  
microseconds. Bit 2 corresponds to bit 7 in the V5 byte. These bits are  
also compared against the microprocessor-written mismatch signal label  
bits for an unequipped and mismatch indication. Code 1 (001) has been  
implemented in hardware and does not have to be written into this loca-  
tion.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 122 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
05E Port 1  
08E Port 2  
0BE Port 3  
0EE Port 4  
7-6  
Latched  
Bn  
Alarms(p)  
Same alarms as the corresponding address 05F, 08F, 0BF, 0EF bit posi-  
tions except that these alarms are latched.  
Unused:  
These bits read out as zero.  
5-4  
3-2  
Unused(np)  
Latched  
Bn  
Same alarms as the corresponding address 05F, 08F, 0BF, 0EF bit posi-  
tions except that these alarms are latched.  
Alarms(p)  
Unused:  
1-0  
7
Unused(np)  
BnRDIPp  
These bits read out as zero.  
B Drop Bus Port n Remote Payload Defect Indication:  
05F Port 1  
08F Port 2  
0BF Port 3  
0EF Port 4  
A 1 indicates  
that a remote payload defect alarm has been detected (bits 5, 6 and 7 in  
K4 (Z7) byte are equal to 010). The number of consecutive events used  
for detection and recovery is determined by control bit V5AL10p.  
B Drop Bus Port n Remote Connectivity Defect Indication:  
A 1 indi-  
6
BnRDICp  
cates that a remote connectivity defect alarm has been detected (bits 5,  
6 and 7 in K4 (Z7) byte are equal to 110). The number of consecutive  
events used for detection and recovery is determined by control bit  
V5AL10p.  
Unused:  
5-4  
3
Unused(np)  
BnJ2LOLp  
These bits read out as zero.  
B Drop Bus Port n J2 Loss Of Lock Alarm:  
Enabled when control bit  
J2nSIZEp is a 0, and control bit J2nCOMp is a 1. A 1 indication occurs  
when the alignment of the 16-byte J2 trace identifier label (message) has  
not been established.  
B Drop Bus Port n J2 Trail Trace Mismatch Alarm:  
Enabled when  
2
BnJ2TIMp  
control bit J2nSIZEp is a 0, and control bit J2nCOMp is a 1. A 1 indicates  
that the stable 16-byte message did not match for one message time.  
Recovery occurs when the J2 state machine loses lock and then  
acquires lock with a 16-byte stable J2 message that matches the J2  
comparison message written by the microprocessor.  
Unused:  
1-0  
7-0  
Unused(np)  
These bits read out as zero.  
B Drop Bus Port n Receive K4 (Z7) Byte:  
The eight bits in this register  
042 Port 1  
072 Port 2  
0A2 Port 3  
0D2 Port 4  
Bn Receive  
K4 (Z7)  
Byte(p)  
position correspond to the K4 (Z7) byte received for the TU/VT selected.  
Bit 7 corresponds to bit 1 in the K4 (Z7) byte.  
B Drop Bus Port n Receive O-bits:  
The two nibbles (bits 7-4 and 3-0)  
043 Port 1  
073 Port 2  
0A3 Port 3  
0D3 Port 4  
7-0  
Bn Receive  
O-Bits(p) in this register correspond to the two sets of four overhead communica-  
tion bits received in the TU/VT selected. Bit 7 corresponds to bit 3 in the  
second justification control byte, while bit 0 corresponds to bit 6 in the  
first justification control byte. The two nibbles written into this register  
location will be from the same frame.  
05C Port 1  
08C Port 2  
0BC Port 3  
0EC Port 4  
7-1  
0
Latched  
Bn  
Alarms(p)  
Same alarms as the following address locations (7-1), except that these  
alarm states are latched.  
Unused:  
Unused(np)  
This bit reads out as indeterminate.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 123 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
B Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection Unequipped Alarm:  
A TC  
unequipped alarm indication (a 1) occurs when bits 3 through 8 in the N2  
(Z6) byte are all equal to 0 for 5 or more consecutive frames. Recovery to  
0 occurs when bits 3 through 8 are not all equal to 0 for 5 or more con-  
secutive frames.  
05D Port 1  
08D Port 2  
0BD Port 3  
0ED Port 4  
7
BnTCUQp  
B Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection AIS Alarm:  
A TC AIS alarm  
6
5
BnTCAISp  
BnTCLMp  
indication (a 1) occurs when bit 4 in the N2 (Z6) byte is equal to 1 for five  
or more consecutive frames. Recovery to 0 occurs when bit 4 is a 0 for  
five or more consecutive frames.  
B Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection Loss Of Multiframe Alarm:  
TC loss of multiframe alarm indication (a 1) occurs when four or more  
consecutive errored multiframes are detected in bits 7 and 8 in the N2  
(Z6) byte. Recovery to 0 occurs when three consecutive non-errored  
multiframes (1111 1111 1111 1110) are detected.  
A
B Drop Bus Port n Bus Tandem Connection Trail Trace Message  
4
3
BnTCLLp  
BnTCTMp  
Loss Of Lock Alarm:  
An alarm indication (a 1) occurs when the align-  
ment of the 16-byte N2 (Z6) Tandem Connection Trace identifier label  
(message) has not been established.  
B Drop Bus Port n Bus Tandem Connection Trail Trace Message  
Mismatch Alarm:  
An alarm indication (a 1) indicates that the stable Tan-  
dem Connection 16-byte message did not match for one message time.  
Recovery to 0 occurs when the N2 (Z6) byte TC message state machine  
loses lock and then acquires lock with a 16-byte stable N2 (Z6) byte  
message that matches the N2 (Z6) byte comparison message written by  
the microprocessor.  
B Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection ODI Alarm:  
A TC ODI alarm  
2
1
BnTCODIp  
BnTCRDIp  
Unused(np)  
indication (a 1) occurs when N2 (Z6) byte bit 7 in frame 74 is equal to 1  
for five or more consecutive frames. Recovery to 0 occurs when bit 7 is a  
0 for five or more consecutive frames.  
B Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection RDI Alarm:  
A TC RDI alarm  
indication (a 1) occurs when N2 (Z6) byte bit 8 in frame 73 is equal to 1  
for five or more consecutive frames. Recovery to 0 occurs when bit 8 is a  
0 for five or more consecutive frames.  
Unused:  
0
This bit reads out as indeterminate.  
B Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection BIP-2 Counter:  
An 8-bit  
180 Port 1  
280 Port 2  
380 Port 3  
480 Port 4  
7-0  
Bn TC  
BIP-2  
Error  
counter which counts the number of BIP-2 errors detected in the N2 (Z6)  
byte for the TU/VT selected when the tandem connection feature is  
Counter(p) enabled. A maximum of two errors can be counted each frame.These  
two errors cause a single count if the BLOCKp control bit is set to 1. The  
counter saturates at full count and is cleared when it is read.  
B Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection REI Counter:  
An 8-bit counter  
which counts the number of REI errors detected in bit 5 in the N2 (Z6)  
byte for the TU/VT selected when the tandem connection feature is  
181 Port 1  
281 Port 2  
381 Port 3  
481 Port 4  
7-0  
Bn TC  
REI  
Error  
Counter(p) enabled. The counter saturates at full count and is cleared when it is  
read.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 124 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
B Drop Bus Port n Tandem Connection OEI Counter:  
which counts the number of OEI errors detected in bit 6 in the N2 (Z6)  
byte for the TU/VT selected when the tandem connection feature is  
182 Port 1  
282 Port 2  
382 Port 3  
482 Port 4  
7-0  
Bn TC  
OEI  
Error  
An 8-bit counter  
Counter(p) enabled. The counter saturates at full count and is cleared when it is  
read.  
B Drop Bus Port n Receive V4 Byte:  
When control bit V4ENp is 1, the  
eight bits in this register position correspond to the V4 byte received in  
the TU/VT selected. Bit 7 corresponds to bit 1 in the V4 byte.  
196 Port 1  
296 Port 2  
396 Port 3  
496 Port 4  
7-0  
Bn  
Receive  
V4  
Byte(p)  
STATUS REGISTERS - PORT n (A and B SIDES) (p=1-4)  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
044 Port 1  
074 Port 2  
0A4 Port 3  
0D4 Port 4  
7
RnFFEp  
Same alarm as the corresponding address 045, 075, 0A5 and 0D5 bit,  
except that this alarm state is latched.  
Unused:  
This bit reads out as 0.  
6
Unused(np)  
5-0  
Latched Tx Same alarms as the corresponding address 045, 075, 0A5 and 0D5 bits,  
Alarms(p) except that these alarm states are latched.  
Receive Port n FIFO Error:  
A 1 indicates that the receive FIFO for port  
n has overflowed or underflowed. The FIFO is reset automatically. Other  
than an alarm indication, no action is taken.  
045 Port 1  
075 Port 2  
0A5 Port 3  
0D5 Port 4  
7
RnFFEp  
Unused:  
This bit reads out as 0.  
6
5
Unused(np)  
ANAnOOLp  
PRBS Analyzer Out of Lock for Port n:  
PRBS Analyzer is out of lock.  
A 1 indicates that the internal  
A 1 indicates that the A Add  
Transmit A Add Bus Port n FIFO Error:  
4
3
2
TAnFEp  
TBnFEp  
TnLOSp  
bus transmit FIFO has overflowed or underflowed. The FIFO is recen-  
tered and is held reset for up to two multiframes automatically. The VT  
AIS payload will be transmitted via the add bus when the FIFO error  
occurs.  
Transmit B Add Bus Port n FIFO Error:  
A 1 indicates that the B Add  
bus transmit FIFO has overflowed or underflowed. The FIFO is recen-  
tered and is held reset for up to two multiframes automatically. The VT  
AIS payload will be transmitted via the add bus when the FIFO error  
occurs.  
Transmit Port n Loss Of Signal:  
An alarm occurs when there are no  
signal transitions detected on the positive rail or negative rail for a period  
of 256 consecutive pulse positions. Recovery occurs when there are at  
least 32 transitions counted for 256 consecutive pulse positions. For an  
NRZ signal, this alarm is active when a low occurs on the external trans-  
mit loss of signal indication lead TLOSpn, which is shared with the TNIpn  
lead.  
Transmit Port n Loss Of Clock:  
A 1 indicates that the transmit clock  
1
TnLOCp  
(TCIpn) for port n has stuck high or low for 6 or more clock cycles.  
Recovery occurs on the first clock transition.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 125 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Transmit Port n AIS Detected:  
045 Port 1  
075 Port 2  
0A5 Port 3  
0D5 Port 4  
(cont.)  
0
TnDAISp  
A 1 indicates that line AIS (0 or 1 zeros  
in 256 bits) has been detected in the bit stream for port n. Recovery  
occurs when there are 3 or more zeros in 256 bits. Other than reporting  
the alarm, no action is taken.  
Transmit Port n Coding Violation Counter:  
Low order byte of a 16-bit  
046 Port 1  
076 Port 2  
0A6 Port 3  
0D6 Port 4  
7-0  
Coding  
Violation  
Counter  
Low  
Order  
Byte(np)  
saturating counter which counts the number of coding errors that have  
occurred in the HDB3 line code. During a read cycle, internal logic holds  
any new count until the read cycle is complete, and then the counter is  
updated. This counter is cleared on a reset pulse, any RESETp,  
RnSETSp or RnSETCp control bit = 1, or when its low order byte is read.  
This low order byte must be read before the high order byte for the same  
port, which is located in the following address.  
Transmit Port n Coding Violation Counter:  
High order byte of an 16-  
047 Port 1  
077 Port 2  
0A7 Port 3  
0D7 Port 4  
7-0  
Coding  
Violation  
Counter  
High  
Order  
Byte(np)  
bit saturating counter which counts the number of coding errors that  
have occurred in the HDB3 line codes. During a read cycle, internal logic  
holds any new count until the read cycle is complete, and then the  
counter is updated. This counter is cleared on a reset pulse, any  
RESETp, RnSETSp or RnSETCp control bit = 1, or when its low order  
byte is read. This high order byte must be read after the low order byte  
for the same port, which is located in the preceding address, but before  
the next read of the low order byte for any port. (Reading the low order  
byte for any port causes a simultaneous transfer of the contents of the  
high order byte for the same port into a high order byte memory location  
that is common to all four ports. When any high order byte is read, the  
data output from the high order byte address is the content of this com-  
mon memory location, not the current content of the addressed high  
order byte.)  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 126 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
PORT n - OPERATIONS (CONTROL) REGISTER DESCRIPTIONS (p=1-4)  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Unused:  
048 Port 1  
078 Port 2  
0A8 Port 3  
0D8 Port 4  
7-5  
4
Unused(np)  
1BnRDIp  
These bits must be written to 0.  
1-Bit/3-Bit RDI Selection for Port n:  
will function as a 3-Bit enhanced RDI. When set to a 1, the selected port  
will function as 1-Bit RDI.  
When set to 0, the selected port  
J2 Transmit Message Enable for Port n:  
A 1 enables a microproces-  
sor-written message to be transmitted. A 0 disables the transmission of  
the J2 message from RAM. Instead, the J2 byte is transmitted as 00H.  
3
2
J2nTENp  
J2nSIZEp  
J2 Message Size Segment for Port n:  
Works in conjunction with the  
J2nCOMp bit according to the following table:  
J2nSIZEp J2nCOMp  
Action  
0
0
1
0
1
X
Transmit and receive J2 message segments  
are configured for a 16-byte message size.  
Microprocessor reads 16-byte segment. J2  
comparison circuit and alarms are disabled.  
Transmit and receive J2 message segments  
are configured for a 16-byte message size.  
Trail Trace message comparison circuit  
enabled.  
Transmit and receive J2 message segments  
are configured for a 64-byte message size.  
Microprocessor reads 64-byte segment. J2  
comparison circuit and alarms are disabled.  
The Tandem Connection feature must be dis-  
abled by setting TCnENp=0.  
J2 Message Comparison Enable Bit for Port n:  
with the J2nSIZEp control bit according to the table given above.  
1
0
J2nCOMp  
J2nAISEp  
Works in conjunction  
J2 AIS/RDI/TC Alarm Enable for Port n:  
A 1 enables Receive E1 AIS, a  
Remote Connectivity Defect Indication, and both of the TC alarms  
(TCnODIp, TCnRDIp) to be transmitted when either an AnJ2TIMp/  
BnJ2TIMp or an AnJ2LOLp/BnJ2LOLp occurs. The AIS, RDI and TC  
alarm generated depend on the bus side selected.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 127 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
A 1 enables an E1 facility (side) loopback for port n.  
The E1 transmit clock and data output signals are looped back internally  
as the E1 receive clock and data input signals. The external E1 receive  
input signals are disabled. The E1 transmit clock and data output signals  
are provided at the interface.  
Facility Loopback:  
050 Port 1  
080 Port 2  
0B0 Port 3  
0E0 Port 4  
7
FnLBKp  
Line Loopback:  
A 1 enables an E1 line (side) loopback for port n. The  
6
LnLBKp  
receive E1 clock and data output signals are looped back internally as  
the E1 transmit input signals. The external E1 transmit clock and data  
input signals are disabled. The E1 receive clock and data output signals  
are provided at the interface.  
Send Receive E1 Line AIS for Port n:  
A 1 enables an E1 AIS  
(unframed all ones signal) to be inserted into the receive data stream for  
port n independent of the status of the internal alarms.  
5
4
3
RnAISp  
TnAISp  
Transmit E1 Line AIS for Port n:  
A 1 enables an E1 AIS (unframed all  
ones signal) to be inserted into the transmit data stream for port n inde-  
pendent of the status of the internal alarms.  
Transmit VT AIS for the TU/VT Selected for Port n:  
TnVTAISp  
A 1 enables a TU/  
VT AIS to be transmitted for the TU/VT selected. A TU/VT AIS consists  
of all ones in the entire TU/VT, including bytes V1 through V4.  
Transmit Port n RFI (Remote Failure Indication):  
A 1 enables an RFI  
alarm to be transmitted (bit 4 in the V5 byte is set to 1).  
2
1
TnRFIp  
Transmit Port n RDIS (Remote Server Defect Indication):  
TnRDISp  
A 1 enables  
an RDIS to be transmitted (bit 8 in the V5 byte is set to 1, and bits 5, 6  
and 7 in the K4 (Z7) byte are set to 101).  
Transmit Port n RDIP (Remote Payload Defect Indication):  
A 1  
0
TnRDIPp  
enables an RDIP to be transmitted (bit 8 in the V5 byte is set to 0, and  
bits 5, 6 and 7 in the K4 (Z7) byte are set to 010).  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 128 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Tandem Connection RDI Generation for Port n:  
to be generated (bit 8 in frame 73 is a 1).  
051 Port 1  
081 Port 2  
0B1 Port 3  
0E1 Port 4  
7
TCnRDIp  
A 1 enables a TC RDI  
A 1 enables a TC ODI  
Tandem Connection ODI Generation for Port n:  
to be generated (bit 7 in frame 74 is a 1).  
6
5
TCnODIp  
TCnAISp  
Tandem Connection AIS Indication Transmitted for Port n:  
A 1  
enables a TC AIS indication to be generated (bit 4 in the N2 (Z6) byte is  
a 1).  
Tandem Connection Feature Enable for Port n:  
A 1 enables the TU  
4
3
TCnENp  
TCnREp  
Tandem Connection Feature (J2nSIZEp must be 0). A 0 disables the  
tandem connection feature. In the receive direction all TC alarms are dis-  
abled. In the transmit direction, bits 3 through 8 in the N2(Z6) byte are  
transmitted as 0 while bits 1 and 2 still contain the calculated BIP-2.  
Tandem Connection Remote Defect Indication Enable for Port n:  
As explained in Note 1, a 1 enables internal defined tandem connection  
alarms to send a TC RDI (bit 8 in frame 73). For example, a TC RDI for  
port 1 is generated:  
- When TC enable (TC1ENp) and TC RDI enable (TC1REp) are 1 and  
any of:  
- Loss Of Pointer Alarm (A1LOPp, B1LOPp)  
- TU AIS Alarm (A1AISp, B1AISp)  
- Drop Bus AIS Alarm (AsUAISIp, BsUAISIp) when HEAISEp is 1  
- Drop Bus H4 Alarm (AsDH4Ep, BsDH4Ep) when DV1SELp is 1  
- Unequipped signal label (A1UNEQp, B1UNEQp) when UQAEp is 1  
- Mismatch signal label (A1SLERp, B1SLERp)  
- J2 Loss Of Lock Alarm (A1J2LOLp, B1J2LOLp) when J21AISEp is 1  
- J2 Mismatch Alarm (A1J2TIMp, B1J2TIMp) when J21AISEp is 1  
- TC Unequipped Alarm (A1TCUQp, B1TCUQp)  
- TC Loss Of Lock Alarm (A1TCLLp, B1TCLLp)  
- TC Mismatch Alarm (A1TCTMp, B1TCTMp)  
- TC Loss Of Multiframe Alarm (A1TCLMp, B1TCLMp)  
- A 1 written to TC1RDIp  
(where s is the STS-1 or AU-3 identifier, 1-3 or A-C)  
- When TC enable (TC1ENp) is a 1 and TC RDI enable (TC1REp) is 0  
and:  
- A 1 written to TC1RDIp.  
Note 1: In determining whether to send TC ODI or TC RDI, it is necessary to sample certain alarm conditions. Since TC  
ODI or TC RDI are sent only once for every 38 ms multiframe, it is conceivable that these alarms may toggle  
more than one time in this interval. Therefore, all the alarms needed to generate TC ODI or TC RDI are sampled  
during every 500 µs multiframe, setting the TC ODI or TC RDI alarm.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 129 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Tandem Connection Outgoing Defect Indication Enable for Port n:  
As explained in Note 1, a 1 enables internal defined tandem connection  
alarms to send a TC ODI (bit 7 in frame 74). For example, a TC ODI for  
port 1 is generated:  
051 Port 1  
081 Port 2  
0B1 Port 3  
0E1 Port 4  
(cont.)  
2
TCnOEp  
- When TC enable (TC1ENp) and TC ODI enable (TC1OEp) are 1 and  
any of:  
- Loss Of Pointer Alarm (A1LOPp, B1LOPp)  
- TU AIS Alarm (A1AISp, B1AISp)  
- Drop Bus AIS Alarm (AsUAISIp, BsUAISIp) when HEAISEp is 1  
- Drop Bus H4 Alarm (AsDH4Ep, BsDH4Ep) when DV1SELp is 1  
- Unequipped signal label (A1UNEQp, B1UNEQp) when UQAEp is 1  
- Mismatch signal label (A1SLERp, B1SLERp)  
- J2 Loss Of Lock Alarm (A1J2LOLp, B1J2LOLp) when J21AISEp is 1  
- J2 Mismatch Alarm (A1J2TIMp, B1J2TIMp) when J21AISEp is 1  
- TC Unequipped Alarm (A1TCUQp, B1TCUQp)  
- TC AIS alarm (A1TCAISp, B1TCAISp)  
- TC Loss Of Lock Alarm (A1TCLLp, B1TCLLp)  
- TC Mismatch Alarm (A1TCTMp, B1TCTMp)  
- TC Loss Of Multiframe Alarm (A1TCLMp, B1TCLMp)  
- A 1 written to TC1ODIp.  
(where s is the STS-1 or AU-3 identifier, 1-3 or A-C)  
- When TC enable (TC1ENp) is a 1 and TC ODI enable (TC1OEp) is 0  
and:  
- A 1 written to TC1ODIp.  
Tandem Connection Line AIS Enable for Port n:  
A 1 enables internal  
receive TC alarms to generate receive E1 line AIS.  
1
0
TCnAENp  
TnRDICp  
Transmit Port n RDIC (Remote Connectivity Defect Indication):  
A 1 enables an RDIC to be transmitted (bit 8 in the V5 byte is set to 1,  
and bits 5, 6 and 7 in the K4 (Z7) byte are set to 110).  
Reset Port n Selected Functions:  
A 1 will clear the alarms, reset the  
052 Port 1  
082 Port 2  
0B2 Port 3  
0E2 Port 4  
7
6
RnSETSp  
RnSETCp  
performance counters to 0, and re-initialize the FIFOs associated with  
port n. The control bits for port n are not reset. This bit is self-clearing,  
and will reset to 0 after the reset cycle is completed.  
Reset Port n Performance Counters:  
A 1 resets the performance  
counters to 0 for port n. This bit is self-clearing, and will reset to 0 after  
the reset cycle is completed.  
Unused:  
5-2  
1
Unused(np)  
TnFB2p  
These bits must be written to 0.  
Transmit Port n BIP-2 Error Mask (Force BIP-2 Error):  
A 1 causes bits  
1 and 2 (the BIP-2 value) in the V5 byte to be inverted from the calcu-  
lated value and transmitted for one frame. This bit is self-clearing, and  
will reset to 0 after the single error is transmitted.  
Note 1: In determining whether to send TC ODI or TC RDI, it is necessary to sample certain alarm conditions. Since TC  
ODI or TC RDI are sent only once for every 38 ms multiframe, it is conceivable that these alarms may toggle  
more than one time in this interval. Therefore, all the alarms needed to generate TC ODI or TC RDI are sampled  
during every 500 µs multiframe, setting the TC ODI or TC RDI alarm.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 130 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Transmit Port n FEBE Error Mask (Force FEBE Error):  
3 (the FEBE value) of the V5 byte to be transmitted as a 1. This control  
bit is self-clearing, and will reset to 0 after the V5 byte has been transmit-  
ted. Please note that if a FEBE is being sent as a result of a receive  
BIP-2 error, the FEBE error set by this bit is transmitted afterwards.  
052 Port 1  
082 Port 2  
0B2 Port 3  
0E2 Port 4  
(cont.)  
0
TnFFBp  
A 1 causes bit  
Unused:  
These bits must be written to 0.  
053 Port 1  
083 Port 2  
0B3 Port 3  
0E3 Port 4  
7-3  
2-0  
Unused(np)  
AnUPSLp  
A Drop Bus Port n Microprocessor-Written Mismatch Signal Label:  
The three bit positions correspond to the three signal label bits found in  
bits 5 through 7 in the V5 byte for the TU/VT selected. Bit 2 in this regis-  
ter corresponds to bit 7 in the V5 byte. The bits written into this register  
are compared against the received signal for a mismatch signal label  
alarm.  
Unused:  
These bits must be written to 0.  
054 Port 1  
084 Port 2  
0B4 Port 3  
0E4 Port 4  
7-3  
2-0  
Unused(np)  
BnUPSLp  
B Drop Bus Port n Microprocessor-Written Mismatch Signal Label:  
The three bit positions correspond to the three signal label bits found in  
bits 5 through 7 in the V5 byte for the TU/VT selected. Bit 2 in this regis-  
ter corresponds to bit 7 in the V5 byte. The bits written into this register  
are compared against the received signal for a mismatch signal label  
alarm.  
Unused:  
055 Port 1  
085 Port 2  
0B5 Port 3  
0E5 Port 4  
7-3  
2-0  
Unused(np)  
These bits must be written to 0.  
Transmit Port n Signal Label:  
Tn TX  
Label(p)  
The three bit positions correspond to the  
three signal label bits found in bits 5 through 7 in the V5 byte for the TU/  
VT selected for transmission. Bit 2 in this register corresponds to bit 7 in  
the V5 byte.  
Transmit K4 (Z7) Value Port n:  
The value written into bits 7, 6, 5, 4 and  
058 Port 1  
088 Port 2  
0B8 Port 3  
0E8 Port 4  
7-4  
Transmit  
K4 (Z7) Byte 0 in this register is transmitted when control bit TOBWZp is 0. Bits 3, 2,  
Value(np) and 1 are assigned for the RDI indicators and cannot be written to in this  
register. Bit 7 corresponds to bit 1 in the K4 (Z7) byte.  
Unused:  
3-1  
0
Unused(np)  
These bits must be written to 0.  
Transmit K4 (Z7) Value Port n:  
Transmit  
The value written into bits 7, 6, 5, 4 and  
K4 (Z7) Byte 0 in this register is transmitted when control bit TOBWZp is 0. Bits 3, 2,  
Value(np) and 1 are assigned for the RDI indicators and cannot be written to in this  
register. Bit 0 corresponds to bit 8 in the K4 (Z7) byte.  
Transmit O Bits Port n:  
The value written into this register is transmitted  
059 Port 1  
089 Port 2  
0B9 Port 3  
0E9 Port 4  
7-0  
7-0  
Transmit  
O-bits(np) when control bit TOBWZp is 0. Bits 7 through 4 correspond to bits 3  
through 6 in the second justification control byte. Bits 3 through 0 corre-  
spond to bits 3 through 6 in the first justification control byte.  
Transmit V4 Byte Port n:  
The value written into this register will be  
transmitted as the V4 byte. Bits 7-0 of the register correspond to bits 1-8  
of the V4 byte.  
511 Port 1  
591 Port 2  
611 Port 3  
691 Port 4  
Transmit  
V4  
Byte(np)  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 131 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
PORT n - A AND B DROP J2 AND N2 (Z6) MESSAGE SEGMENTS (p=1-4)  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
A Side Drop J2 and N2 (Z6) Message Segments:  
140 Port 1  
240 Port 2  
340 Port 3  
440 Port 4  
to  
17F Port 1  
27F Port 2  
37F Port 3  
47F Port 4  
7-0  
A Side  
Receive  
J2  
The following loca-  
tions store the received 64-byte J2 message when control bit J2nSIZEp  
is a 1, and the received 16-byte J2 message and microprocessor-written  
16-byte J2 message when J2nSIZEp is a 0, and the received 16-byte N2  
(Z6) trail trace message and microprocessor-written 16-byte N2 (Z6)  
message used for message mismatch comparison.  
and  
N2 (Z6)  
Message  
Segments(np)  
Location  
X40-X7F  
Message Segment  
J2 Message size configured for 64 bytes. The 64-byte  
message is written into memory with no specific start-  
ing address location. The N2 (Z6) tandem connection  
feature is disabled.  
X40-X4F  
X50-X5F  
Received 16-byte J2 message segment.  
Microprocessor-written 16-byte J2 message segment.  
The starting address of the message must be written to  
location X50 (multiframe value of 1).  
X60-X6F  
X70-X7F  
Received 16-byte N2 (Z6) message segment.  
Microprocessor-written 16-byte N2 (Z6) message seg-  
ment. The starting address of the message must be  
written to location X70 (multiframe value of 1).  
B Side Drop J2 and N2 (Z6) Message Segments:  
The following loca-  
1C0 Port 1  
2C0 Port 2  
3C0 Port 3  
4C0 Port 4  
to  
1FF Port 1  
2FF Port 2  
3FF Port 3  
4FF port 4  
7-0  
B Side  
Receive  
J2  
tions store the received 64-byte J2 message when control bit J2nSIZEp  
is a 1, and the received 16-byte J2 message and microprocessor-written  
16-byte J2 message when J2nSIZEp is a 0, and the received 16-byte N2  
(Z6) trail trace message and microprocessor-written 16-byte N2 (Z6)  
message used for message mismatch comparison.  
and  
N2 (Z6)  
Message  
Segments(np)  
Location  
Message Segment  
XC0-XFF  
J2 Message size configured for 64 bytes. The 64-byte  
message is written into memory with no specific start-  
ing address location. The N2 (Z6) tandem connection  
feature is disabled.  
XC0-XCF  
XD0-XDF  
Received 16-byte J2 message segment.  
Microprocessor-written 16-byte J2 message segment.  
The starting address of the message must be written to  
location XD0 (multiframe value of 1).  
XE0-XEF  
XF0-XFF  
Received 16-byte N2 (Z6) message segment.  
Microprocessor-written 16-byte N2 (Z6) message seg-  
ment. The starting address of the message must be  
written to location XF0 (multiframe value of 1).  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 132 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Address  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
Transmit J2 and N2 (Z6) Message Segments:  
store the transmitted 64-byte J2 message when control bit J2nSIZEp is a  
1, and the transmitted 16-byte J2 and N2 (Z6) messages when  
J2nSIZEp is a 0.  
540 Port 1  
5C0 Port 2  
640 Port 3  
6C0 Port 4  
to  
7-0  
Transmit  
J2  
and  
N2 (Z6)  
Message  
The following locations  
57F Port 1  
5FF Port 2  
67F Port 3  
6FF Port 4  
Segments(np) Location  
540-57F (Port 1)  
Message Segment  
J2 Message size configured for 64 bytes.  
The 64-byte message is transmitted from no  
specific starting address. The tandem  
connection feature is disabled.  
5C0-5FF (Port 2)  
640-67F (Port 3)  
6C0-6FF (Port 4)  
540-54F (Port 1)  
5C0-5CF (Port 2)  
640-64F (Port 3)  
6C0-6CF (Port 4)  
J2 Message size configured for 16 bytes.  
The 16-byte message is transmitted with no  
specific starting address.  
560-56F (Port 1)  
5E0-5EF (Port 2)  
660-66F (Port 3)  
6E0-6EF (Port 4)  
N2 (Z6) Message size configured for 16 bytes.  
The 16-byte message is transmitted with no  
specific starting address.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 133 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
APPLICATION EXAMPLES  
The E1Mx16 can be used in a wide range of telecommunication and data communication applications:  
Terminal Multiplexers, with bus redundancy  
Add/Drop Multiplexers for TU/VT tributaries  
Add/Drop Multiplexers for protection rings  
The following diagram illustrates a typical application using the E1Mx16.  
WEST TERMINAL  
EAST TERMINAL  
PHAST-3N (TXC-06103)  
and  
Bus Drivers/Receivers  
PHAST-3N (TXC-06103)  
and  
Bus Drivers/Receivers  
STM-1/STS-3  
STM-1/STS-3  
B DROP  
B ADD  
A DROP  
A ADD  
MICROPROCESSOR  
BUS  
E1Mx16  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
TXC-04216  
Up to 63 E1 channels per STS-3  
Figure 25. Typical Application using the E1Mx16  
The application diagram in Figure 25 shows a fully configured bidirectional add/drop fiber multiplexer. Using the  
full four-bus capability of the E1Mx16, channels may be dropped from either direction with full time slot reuse in  
both directions. Using only the B Drop and the A Add buses provides add/drop service back to the network  
source only, and eliminates the block marked East Terminalfor a terminal configuration.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 134 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
PACKAGE INFORMATION  
The E1Mx16 device is packaged in a 388-lead plastic ball grid array package suitable for surface mounting, as  
illustrated in Figure 26.  
Bottom View  
E
E2  
-E1-  
b
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
58 51  
58 51  
58 51  
58 51  
58 51  
58 51  
58 51  
58  
58  
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
26  
25  
24  
5
5
51  
51  
5
5
51  
51  
5
51  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
TRANSWITCH  
TXC-04216AIBG  
5
5
5
5
5
5
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
51  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
-D1-  
D D2  
Note 2  
E1/4  
e
8
7
6
5
4
5
5
5
5
51  
51  
51  
51  
5
5
5
5
51  
51  
51  
51  
5
5
5
5
51  
51  
51  
51  
D1/4  
3
2
1
AE  
AC  
AA  
Y
W
V
U
T
R
P
N
M
L
K
J
H
G
F
E D C B A  
AF  
AD  
AB  
A2  
A
A3  
A1  
51  
5
51  
5
51  
5
51  
5
Dimension (Note 1)  
Min  
Max  
0.70  
A (Nom)  
A1  
2.53  
Notes:  
0.50  
1. All dimensions are in millimeters. Values shown are for  
reference only.  
2. Identification of the solder ball A1 corner is contained  
within this shaded zone. Package corner may not be a  
90° angle.  
A2 (Nom)  
A3 (Nom)  
b (Ref.)  
D
1.17  
0.72  
0.76  
34.90  
35.10  
D1 (Nom)  
D2  
31.75  
32.60  
35.10  
32.40  
34.90  
E
E1 (Nom)  
E2  
31.75  
1.27  
32.40  
32.60  
e (Ref.)  
Figure 26. E1Mx16 TXC-04216 388-Lead Plastic Ball Grid Array Package  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 135 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
ORDERING INFORMATION  
E1Mx16 DEVICE  
Part Number: TXC-04216AIBG  
388-Lead Plastic Ball Grid Array Package  
TXC-04252-SCAA-FDPE  
E1Mx16 MICROCODE (uses QE1M microcode)  
Part Number:  
RELATED PRODUCTS  
TXC-02302B, SYN155C VLSI Device (155-Mbit/s Synchronizer, Clock and Data Out-  
put). This device is similar to the SYN155. It has both clock and data outputs on the  
line side.  
TXC-03001B, SOT-1 VLSI Device (SONET STS-1 Overhead Terminator). This is a  
dual-mode device, which can be configured either to emulate the TXC-03001 device  
or to provide additional capabilities.  
TXC-03003B, SOT-3 VLSI Device (STM-1/STS-3/STS-3c Overhead Terminator).  
This device performs section, line and path overhead processing for STM-1/STS-3/  
STS-3c signals. Compliant with ANSI and ITU-T standards.  
TXC-03011, SOT-1E VLSI Device (SONET STS-1 Overhead Terminator). This device  
provides extended features relative to the 84-lead TXC-03001 and TXC-03001B  
SOT-1 devices, and it has a 144-lead package.  
TXC-04252, QE1M VLSI Device (Quad E1 to AU-4/VT2 or TU-12 Async Mapper-  
Desync). Interconnects four E1 signals with any four asynchronous mode VT2 or  
TU-12 tributaries carried in SDH AU-4/AU-3 rate payload interface.  
TXC-06103, PHAST-3N VLSI Device (SONET STM-1, STS-3 or STS-3c Overhead  
Terminator). The PHAST-3N VLSI device provides a Telecom Bus interface for down-  
stream devices and operates from a power supply of 3.3 volts. It combines the func-  
tions of the SOT-3 and SYN155C devices.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 136 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
STANDARDS DOCUMENTATION SOURCES  
Telecommunication technical standards and reference documentation may be obtained from the following  
organizations:  
ANSI (U.S.A.):  
American National Standards Institute  
11 West 42nd Street  
Tel: (212) 642-4900  
Fax: (212) 302-1286  
Web: www.ansi.org  
New York, New York 10036  
The ATM Forum (U.S.A., Europe, Asia):  
2570 West El Camino Real  
Suite 304  
Tel: (650) 949-6700  
Fax: (650) 949-6705  
Web: www.atmforum.com  
Mountain View, CA 94040  
ATM Forum Europe Office  
Av. De Tervueren 402  
1150 Brussels  
Belgium  
Tel: 2 761 66 77  
Fax: 2 761 66 79  
ATM Forum Asia-Pacific Office  
Hamamatsu-cho Suzuki Building 3F  
1-2-11, Hamamatsu-cho, Minato-ku  
Tokyo 105-0013, Japan  
Tel: 3 3438 3694  
Fax: 3 3438 3698  
Bellcore  
(See Telcordia)  
CCITT (  
See ITU-T)  
EIA (U.S.A.):  
Electronic Industries Association  
Tel: (800) 854-7179 (within U.S.A.)  
Tel: (314) 726-0444 (outside U.S.A.)  
Fax: (314) 726-6418  
Global Engineering Documents  
7730 Carondelet Avenue, Suite 407  
Clayton, MO 63105-3329  
Web: www.global.ihs.com  
ETSI (Europe):  
European Telecommunications Standards Institute  
650 route des Lucioles  
Tel: 4 92 94 42 22  
Fax: 4 92 94 43 33  
Web: www.etsi.org  
06921 Sophia Antipolis Cedex  
France  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 137 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
GO-MVIP (U.S.A.):  
The Global Organization for Multi-Vendor Integration  
Protocol (GO-MVIP)  
Tel: (800) 669-6857 (within U.S.A.)  
Tel: (903) 769-3717 (outside U.S.A.)  
Fax: (508) 650-1375  
3220 N Street NW, Suite 360  
Washington, DC 20007  
Web: www.mvip.org  
ITU-T (International):  
Publication Services of International Telecommunication Tel: 22 730 5111  
Union  
Telecommunication Standardization Sector  
Place des Nations, CH 1211  
Fax: 22 733 7256  
Web: www.itu.int  
Geneve 20, Switzerland  
MIL-STD (U.S.A.):  
DODSSP Standardization Documents Ordering Desk  
Building 4 / Section D  
Tel: (215) 697-2179  
Fax: (215) 697-1462  
700 Robbins Avenue  
Web: www.dodssp.daps.mil  
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094  
PCI SIG (U.S.A.):  
PCI Special Interest Group  
2575 NE Kathryn Street #17  
Hillsboro, OR 97124  
Tel: (800) 433-5177 (within U.S.A.)  
Tel: (503) 693-6232 (outside U.S.A.)  
Fax: (503) 693-8344  
Web: www.pcisig.com  
Telcordia (U.S.A.):  
Telcordia Technologies, Inc.  
Attention - Customer Service  
8 Corporate Place  
Tel: (800) 521-CORE (within U.S.A.)  
Tel: (908) 699-5800 (outside U.S.A.)  
Fax: (908) 336-2559  
Piscataway, NJ 08854  
Web: www.telcordia.com  
TTC (Japan):  
TTC Standard Publishing Group of the  
Telecommunications Technology Committee  
Tel: 3 3432 1551  
Fax: 3 3432 1553  
Web: www.ttc.or.jp  
2nd Floor, Hamamatsu-cho Suzuki Building,  
1 2-11, Hamamatsu-cho, Minato-ku, Tokyo  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 138 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
LIST OF DATA SHEET CHANGES  
This change list identifies those areas within this updated E1Mx16 Data Sheet that have significant differences  
relative to the previous and now superseded E1Mx16 Data Sheet:  
Updated E1Mx16 Data Sheet: PRELIMINARY Ed. 2, October 2000  
Previous E1Mx16 Data Sheet: PRODUCT PREVIEW Ed. 1, December 1999  
The page numbers indicated below of this updated Data Sheet include changes relative to the previous Data  
Sheet.  
Page Number of  
Updated Data Sheet  
Summary of the Change  
Changed edition number and date.  
All  
All  
Changed Data Sheet status markings and explanatory text on pages 1 and  
141 from PRODUCT PREVIEW to PRELIMINARY.  
2-3  
25  
Changed Table of Contents and List of Figures.  
Added Latch Up specification to the Absolute Maximum Ratings and  
Environmental Limitations Table. Changed the value in the column labeled  
Maxin the Thermal Characteristics Table.  
29  
31  
Changed Min value for Symbol tH in table of Figure 4.  
Changed names of the second and sixth signals from top in Figure 6. In the  
table, added /DPARand /parity to Parametertext on third, fourth, tenth,  
eleventh and fourteenth rows, changed value of capacitance in the Load”  
column in four places.  
32  
Changed names of the second and sixth signals from the top in Figure 7. In the  
table added /DPAR and /parity to the parameter text on the third, fourth tenth,  
eleventh and fourteenth rows, changed value of capacitance in the "Load"  
column in four places.  
33  
34  
Changed name of fourth signal from the top in Figure 8. In the table, added  
/APARand /parity to Parametertext on the seventh, eighth and eleventh  
rows, changed value of capacitance in the Loadcolumn in three places.  
Changed name of fourth signal from the top in Figure 9. In the table, added  
/APARand /parity to Parametertext on the seventh, eighth and eleventh  
rows, changed value of capacitance in the Loadcolumn in three places.  
43  
51  
Added TRS (INPUT) signal diagram to bottom of Figure 14. Added TRS Pulse  
Widthrow to bottom of table.  
In the "Add and Drop Bus V1 Reference Selection for Group P" table, Changed  
the entry in the DV1REFp column to 0 in the first two rows labeled "Drop bus  
timing selected ".  
62  
63  
Switched position of the words Connectivityand Payloadin the third line of  
the paragraph V5 and K4 (Z7) Byte Coding (for 3-Bit RDI)”  
Changed the last line of the note on the bottom of the page.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 139 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
Page Number of  
Updated Data Sheet  
Summary of the Change  
77-81  
86  
Added Jitter Measurements section.  
Deleted note below the Boundary Scan Operation section.  
88  
Deleted 24 page Boundary Scan Chain table. Changed Boundary Scan Chain  
description paragraph and added footnotes.  
99  
Shaded the first entry in the column Bit 4, symbol 1BnRDIpof the  
operations and control register table.  
102  
105  
Changed text for the description of the Add Bus Delayfor Address 11, Bit 7,  
Symbol ABDp.  
Changed text for description of address 013, Bit 5, Symbol DV1REFp in the  
common registers table.  
137 - 138  
139-140  
Changed Standards Documentation Sources section.  
Added List of Data Sheet Changes section.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
- 140 -  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
- NOTES -  
TranSwitch reserves the right to make changes to the product(s) or  
circuit(s) described herein without notice. No liability is assumed as a  
result of their use or application. TranSwitch assumes no liability for  
TranSwitch applications assistance, customer product design, soft-  
ware performance, or infringement of patents or services described  
herein. Nor does TranSwitch warrant or represent that any license,  
either express or implied, is granted under any patent right, copyright,  
mask work right, or other intellectual property right of TranSwitch cov-  
ering or relating to any combination, machine, or process in which  
such semiconductor products or services might be or are used.  
PRELIMINARY information documents con-  
tain information on products in the sampling,  
preproduction or early production phases of  
the product life cycle. Characteristic data and  
other specifications are subject to change.  
Contact TranSwitch Applications Engineering  
for current information on this product.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 141 -  
Engines for Global Connectivity  
TranSwitch Corporation 3 Enterprise Drive Shelton, CT 06484 USA Tel: 203-929-8810 Fax: 203-926-9453 www.transwitch.com  
- 142 -  
E1Mx16  
TXC-04216  
DATA SHEET  
DOCUMENTATION UPDATE REGISTRATION FORM  
If you would like to receive updated documentation for selected devices as it becomes available, please provide  
the information requested below (print clearly or type) then tear out this page, fold and mail it to the Marketing  
Communications Department at TranSwitch. Marketing Communications will ensure that the relevant Product  
Information Sheets, Data Sheets, Application Notes, Technical Bulletins and other publications are sent to you.  
(203.926.9453)  
(info@txc.com)  
, or  
You may also choose to provide the same information by fax  
, or by e-mail  
. Most of these documents will also be made immediately available for direct  
www.transwitch.com  
(203.929.8810)  
by telephone  
download as Adobe PDF files from the TranSwitch World Wide Web Site (  
).  
Name: ________________________________________________________________________________  
Company: ___________________________________________Title: ______________________________  
Dept./Mailstop: __________________________________________________________________________  
Street: ________________________________________________________________________________  
City/State/Zip: __________________________________________________________________________  
If located outside U.S.A., please add - Country: ________________ Postal Code: ___________________  
Telephone: ________________________  
Ext.: _____________ Fax: __________________________  
E-mail: ________________________________________________  
Please provide the following details for the managers in charge of the following departments at your company  
location.  
Department  
Title  
Name  
Company/Division  
Engineering  
__________________  
__________________  
__________________  
__________________  
__________________  
__________________  
Marketing  
Please describe briefly your intended application(s) and indicate whether you would like to have a TranSwitch  
applications engineer contact you to provide further assistance:  
_____________________________________________________________________________________________  
____________________________________________________________________________________________  
____________________________________________________________________________________________  
____________________________________________________________________________________________  
If you are also interested in receiving updated documentation for other TranSwitch device types, please list them below  
rather than submitting separate registration forms:  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________  
__________ __________  
__________ __________  
Please fold, tape and mail this page (see other side) or fax it to Marketing Communications at 203.926.9453.  
PRELIMINARY TXC-04216-MB  
Ed. 2, October 2000  
- 143 -  
Engines for Global Connectivity  
(Fold back on this line second, then tape closed, stamp and mail.)  
3 Enterprise Drive  
Shelton, CT 06484-4694  
U.S.A.  
First  
Class  
Postage  
Required  
TranSwitch Corporation  
Attention: Marketing Communications Dept.  
3 Enterprise Drive  
Shelton, CT 06484-4694  
U.S.A.  
(Fold back on this line first.)  
Please complete the registration form on this back cover sheet, and mail or fax it, if you wish to  
receive updated documentation on selected TranSwitch products as it becomes available.  
TranSwitch Corporation 3 Enterprise Drive Shelton, CT 06484 USA Tel: 203-929-8810 Fax: 203-926-9453 www.transwitch.com  

相关型号:

TXC-04222

Support Circuit, 1-Func, PBGA376, PLASTIC, BGA-376
TRANSWITCH

TXC-04222AIOG

Support Circuit, 1-Func, PBGA376, 23 X 23 MM, PLASTIC, BGA-376
TRANSWITCH

TXC-04226

Telecommunication IC
ETC

TXC-04226AIBG

Telecomm/Datacomm
ETC

TXC-04226AIEB

Support Circuit, 1-Func, PBGA400, 27 X 27 MM, PLASTIC, EBGA-400
TRANSWITCH

TXC-04226BIBG

Support Circuit, 1-Func, PBGA400, 27 X 27 MM, PLASTIC, BGA-400
TRANSWITCH

TXC-04251AIPQ

Support Circuit, 1-Func, PQFP160, PLASTIC, QFP-160
TRANSWITCH

TXC-04252-AIPQ

ATM/SONET/SDH SUPPORT CIRCUIT, PQFP160, PLASTIC, QFP-160
TRANSWITCH

TXC-04252AIPQ

Support Circuit, 1-Func, PQFP160, PLASTIC, QFP-160
TRANSWITCH

TXC-05101-CIPQ

Telecom Circuit, 1-Func, PQFP144, PLASTIC, QFP-144
TRANSWITCH

TXC-05132AIBG

Telecom Circuit, 1-Func, PBGA304, 31 X 31 MM, PLASTIC, BGA-304
TRANSWITCH

TXC-05230

Micro Peripheral IC
TRANSWITCH